FH-P9200MP
Transcription
FH-P9200MP
FH-P9200MP \ Multi-CD control DSP High power CD/MP3/WMA/MD player with FM/AM tuner FM/AM ¸© @ð CD è¸d DSP à% CD/ MP3/WMA/MD t´ English Operation Manual ¬© $ Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. Before You Start About this manual 5 Precautions 5 Features 5 About WMA 6 Switching the DSP setting mode 6 Resetting the microprocessor 6 About the demo mode 7 Reverse mode 7 Feature demo 7 About basic displays 7 SOFT KEY operation 8 Switching the function of the multifunction buttons 8 Example of multi-function button operation 8 The difference between the BAND button and the BACK button 9 Key guidance indicator 10 Setting the display angle 10 Use and care of the remote control 11 Installing the battery 11 Replacing the battery 11 Using the remote control 11 FUNCTION button and AUDIO button 12 Whats What Head unit 13 Remote control 14 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on 15 Selecting a source 15 Turning the unit off 15 Tuner Listening to the radio 16 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 16 2 En Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 17 Tuning in strong signals 17 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 17 Selecting stations from the preset channel list 18 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD 19 Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation 20 Repeating play 20 Playing tracks in a random order 20 Scanning tracks of a CD 20 Selecting tracks from the track title list 21 Pausing CD playback 21 Selecting the search method 21 Searching every 10 track in the current disc 21 Entering disc titles 22 Using disc title functions 22 MP3/WMA Player Playing a MP3/WMA 23 Introduction of advanced built-in CD player (MP3/WMA) operation 24 Repeating play 24 Playing tracks in a random order 25 Scanning folders and tracks 25 Pausing MP3/WMA playback 25 Selecting folders from the folder title list 26 Selecting the search method 26 Searching every 10 track in the current folder 26 Switching the tag display 27 Using disc title functions 27 Built-in MD Player Playing an MD 28 Contents English Introduction of advanced built-in MD player operation 29 Repeating play 29 Non group-recorded MD 29 Group-recorded MD 29 Playing tracks in a random order 29 Scanning tracks of a MD 30 Selecting tracks from the track title list 30 Selecting groups from the group title list 30 Pausing MD playback 31 Using disc title functions 31 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD 32 50-disc multi-CD player 32 Selecting a disc directly 32 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 33 Repeating play 33 Playing tracks in a random order 33 Scanning CDs and tracks 34 Selecting tracks from the track title list 34 Selecting discs from the disc title list 34 Pausing CD playback 35 Using ITS playlists 35 Creating a playlist with ITS programming 35 Playback from your ITS playlist 36 Erasing a track from your ITS playlist 36 Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist 36 Entering disc titles 36 Using disc title functions 37 Using compression and bass emphasis 38 TV tuner Using the TV tuner 39 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 39 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 39 Selecting channels from the preset channel list 40 DVD Player Playing a disc 41 Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 41 Repeating play 42 Playing tracks in a random order 42 Scanning tracks of a CD 42 Pausing disc playback 42 Using ITS playlist, disc title input and disc title list functions 42 Audio Adjustments Operation modes 43 Operation mode marks 43 43 3-way network mode 43 Standard mode Adjusting the audio easily 43 Adjusting the audio finely 43 Extra functions 44 Introduction of audio adjustments 44 Using the position selector 44 45 Using balance adjustment 45 Using balance adjustment Using the time alignment 45 Adjusting the time alignment 46 47 About the network function Adjustable parameters 47 Points concerning network adjustments 47 Muting the speaker unit (filter) 48 Adjusting network 48 Using subwoofer output 49 Adjusting subwoofer settings 49 Using the high pass filter 50 Setting the high pass filter for front speakers 50 Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers 50 En 3 Contents Using the auto-equalizer 50 Recalling equalizer curves 50 Adjusting equalizer curves 51 Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer 51 52 Using BBE sound Adjusting BBE sound level 52 Adjusting loudness 52 Using sound field control and BBE sound 52 Recalling sound field programs 53 Adjusting BBE sound level 53 Using automatic sound levelizer 53 Adjusting source levels 53 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and 54 auto-equalizing) Before operating the auto TA and EQ function 54 Carrying out auto TA and EQ 55 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 57 Using reverse mode 57 Using the feature demo 57 Switching the auxiliary setting 57 Selecting the digital attenuator 58 Switching the telephone muting/ attenuation 58 Setting the FM tuning step 58 Setting the AM tuning step 58 Other Functions Attenuating volume 60 Displaying and setting the clock 60 Turning the off clock display on or off 60 Setting the date 60 Setting the clock 60 Matching the time to a time signal 60 Setting the time signal display 61 Changing the display form 61 4 En Adjusting the brightness 61 Switching the dimmer setting 61 Setting the flash light screen 61 Selecting the wall paper pattern 62 Switching the font 62 Using different entertainment displays 62 Setting the movie screen 62 Setting the level indicator display 62 Setting the ASL display 63 Setting the background visual 63 Setting the background still picture 63 Canceling the entertainment display 63 Using the AUX source 63 Selecting AUX as the source 63 Setting the AUX title 64 Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages 65 Understanding built-in MD player error messages 65 Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages 65 CD player and care 66 CD-R/CD-RW discs 67 MP3 and WMA files 67 MP3 additional information 68 WMA additional information 68 About folders and MP3/WMA files 68 MD player and care 69 DSP adjustment value record sheet 70 3-way network mode 70 Standard mode 70 Equalizer curves 70 Terms 71 Specifications 72 Section 01 Before You Start Features This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this products potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and observe precautions on this page and in other sections. CD playback Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible. Precautions CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car. ! Protect this product from moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. MP3 file playback It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com. English About this manual WMA file playback It is possible to play back WMA files recorded on CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 standard recordings). Playback of MDs featuring long recordings This unit is MDLP compatible, so you can playback MDs featuring long recordings. ! MDLP is a data compression system that lets you record on regular MDs for 2 or 4 times the length of time previously possible. Group-recorded MD playback Using a group-recorded MD, it is possible to play back tracks by the desired group (albums, artists, favorites, etc.). En 5 Section 01 Before You Start About WMA WARNING Do not use the unit in standard mode when a speaker system for 3-way network mode is connected to this unit. This may cause damage to the speakers. The Windows Media" logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can playback the WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly. ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Switching the DSP setting mode This unit features two operation modes: the 3way network mode (NW) and the standard mode (STD). You can switch between modes as desired. Initially, the DSP setting is set to the standard mode (STD). ! After switching, reset the microprocessor. 6 En % Use a thin standard tip screwdriver to switch the DSP switch on the side of this unit. Resetting the microprocessor The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! Prior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages appear on the display % Press RESET on the head unit with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Section 01 Before You Start About basic displays This unit features two demonstration modes. One is the reverse mode, the other is the feature demo mode. ! When the source is off, you can check the location of 5 and 6 by turning on the feature demo. This unit is equipped with three forms of basic display. You can select the desired display. English About the demo mode FORM1 Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. FORM2 Reverse mode If you do not perform an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. Pressing 5 numbered button when power to this unit is turned off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON cancels the reverse mode. Pressing 5 numbered button again to start the reverse mode. FORM3 Note For details, refer to Changing the display form on page 61. Feature demo The feature demo automatically starts when power to this unit is turned off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. Pressing 6 numbered button during feature demo operation cancels the feature demo mode. Pressing 6 numbered button again to start the feature mode. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off, it may drain battery power. En 7 Section 01 Before You Start SOFT KEY operation Notes SOFT KEY operation means that the function of a button changes as indicated on the display. The multi-function buttons provide SOFT KEY operation; the functions performed by the buttons change according to the function or setting that has been selected. Function names ! The number of functions or displays switched through will differ according to the source or menu selected. ! When no function is indicated for a button, that button is not currently active. Example of multi-function button operation Here the random play function of the built-in CD player is used as an example to illustrate operation of the multi-function buttons. Multi-function buttons The explanations given in this manual are based on FORM1 display. If you have selected FORM2 or FORM3, the functions of some of the multi-function buttons may be different from those indicated in the manual. Important In this manual, for operations using the multifunction buttons the function displayed is used as the name of the function button. 1 Press NEXT to display FUNC. Press NEXT until FUNC appears. 2 Press FUNC to enter the function menu. With the switch to the function menu, the functions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. 3 Press RDM to select the random mode. 4 Press RDM to turn random play on. Switching the function of the multi-function buttons The d indicator shows that the multi-function buttons have functions other than those currently displayed. When this indicator is visible, press NEXT to switch through the functions of the multi-function buttons. % Press NEXT to display the desired functions (e.g., built-in CD player). Press NEXT repeatedly to switch between the following functions: The light illuminates. # Press RDM again to turn random play off. The light goes off. 8 En Section 01 Before You Start English 5 Press BACK to exit the function menu. When the function menu is exited, the functions of the multi-function buttons also change simultaneously. Notes ! You can also turn random play on or off by pressing a or b in the random mode. ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. The difference between the BAND button and the BACK button BAND button Pressing the BAND button immediately cancels the current menu or mode, and returns to the basic displays. ! When the source is the tuner or television and no menu or mode is selected, pressing the BAND button has the effect of switching bands. BACK button Pressing the BACK button cancels the current menu or mode and returns to the previously selected menu or mode. En 9 Section 01 Before You Start Display example (e.g., built-in CD player) The number shows the current menu level. Key guidance indicator This units display features key guidance indicators. These light to indicate which of the a/ b/c/d buttons you can use. When youre in the function menu, audio menu or the other menus, they also make it easy to see which a/ b/c/d buttons you can use to switch functions on or off, switch repeat selections and perform other operations. Note In this manual, operation for each mode is given mainly in terms of the multi-function buttons. However, in each mode, when the key guidance indicators are lit it is also possible to use a/b/c/ d to operate the mode. Setting the display angle You can adjust front panel angle for easier operation. WARNING Key guidance indicators 10 En ! Do not use with the front panel left open. If you do leave it open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. Section 01 Before You Start Replacing the battery Remove the battery. English ! Be careful not to catch your finger in the front panel when it is opening or closing. % Press ANGLE to change the angle. Each press of ANGLE changes the angle. WARNING Notes ! While a disc is left partially inserted, you cannot operate the angle. ! By pressing ANGLE and hold, you can open or close the front panel. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Remove the cover on the back of the steering remote control and insert the battery with the plus (+) and minus () poles pointing in the proper direction. Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. CAUTION ! Use only one CR2032 (3 V) lithium battery. ! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer. ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the battery in fire. ! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ! Do not store the battery with metallic materials. ! In the event of battery leakage, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new battery. ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions rules that apply in your country/area. Using the remote control Important ! Do not operate this unit while manipulating the steering wheel as it might result in a traffic accident. En 11 Section 01 Before You Start ! If you have to operate this unit unavoidably when driving, look ahead carefully to avoid the risk of being involved in a traffic accident. ! If any of the following troubles occur, immediately stop using this unit and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased it: the unit is smoking. the unit is emitting abnormal odor. a foreign object has entered the unit. liquid has been spilled on or into the unit. If you continue to use this unit without finding a remedy, the unit may be damaged badly, resulting in a serious accident or fire. ! Do not leave this unit free (unattached) inside the car. When the car stops or turns a curve, the unit might drop on the floor. If the unit rolls under the brake pedal, it might prevent the driver from braking well, causing serious trouble. Be sure to fix this unit to the steering wheel. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit. To do so may cause a fault. FUNCTION button and AUDIO button Operation of the FUNCTION button and the AUDIO button on the remote control differs from the operation of the FUNC button and the AUDIO button on the head unit. When operating the head unit, use the FUNC button and the AUDIO button to select the appropriate menu, then use the multi-function buttons to select the mode. When operating the remote control, however, switch through the modes as described below to select the mode. FUNCTION button operation % Press FUNCTION to select the desired mode (e.g., built-in CD player). Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following modes: RPTRDMSCANT.LISTPAUSETTLin R.SRCHT.READ 12 En Note Refer to Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation on page 20. AUDIO button operation % Press AUDIO to select the desired mode. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following modes: BALNWPOSIT.ALEQ 1EQ 2BBE LOUDASLSLA F/BLOUDSFCEQ 1EQ 2ASLPOSI T.ALA.EQSW1SW2HPF FHPF R SLA Note Refer to Introduction of audio adjustments on page 44. Section 02 Whats What 2 English 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 Head unit 1 ANGLE button Press to change the display angle. 2 Multi-function buttons Change according to the funtion or setting that has been selected. 3 CD EJECT button Press to eject a CD from your built-in CD player. 4 MD EJECT button Press to eject a MD from your built-in MD player. 5 RESET button Press to reset the microprocessor. 6 NEXT button Press to switch through the functions of multi-function buttons. 9 a b 8 SOURCE selector This unit is turned on by selecting a source. When you press SOURCE, it extends outward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract SOURCE, press it again. Rotate to cycle through all of the available sources. 9 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. a VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends outward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. b BAND button Press to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions. 7 BACK button Press to return to the previously mode. En 13 Section 02 Whats What c b g 9 d e f Remote control Operation is the same as when using the button on the head unit. c ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. d VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume. e FUNCTION button Press to select functions. f AUDIO button Press to select various sound quality controls. g SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press to cycle through all of the available sources. Note If you press FUNCTION on the remote control while pressing BAND on it, the remote control will not function properly. To cancel this setting, press AUDIO on the remote control while press- 14 En ing BAND on it to return to the previous setting. Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on # When using the remote control, press SOURCE to turn the unit on. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-in CD player, load a CD in this unit (refer to page 19). To switch to the built-in MD player, load an MD in this unit (refer to page 28). % Rotate SOURCE on the head unit to select a source. Rotate SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TunerTelevisionDVD player/Multi-DVD playerBuilt-in CD playerMulti-CD playerBuilt-in MD playerExternal unit 1External unit 2AUXSources off English % Rotate SOURCE on the head unit to turn the unit on. When you select a source the unit is turned on. incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. Two external units can be controlled by this unit. When two external units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this units blue lead is connected to the cars auto-antenna relay control terminal, the cars antenna extends when this units selected source is the tuner. To retract the antenna, switch to a source other than tuner. Turning the unit off % Rotate SOURCE on the head unit until the unit turns off. When using the remote control, press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. # When using the remote control, press SOURCE repeatedly. Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. When no disc is set in this unit. When no disc is set in the DVD player. When no magazine is set in the multi-CD player. When no magazine is set in the multi-DVD player. When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 57). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although En 15 Section 04 Tuner Listening to the radio 1 2 34 FORM1 These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on this page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 58). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 4 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 1 Rotate SOURCE to select the tuner. Rotate SOURCE until you see Tuner displayed. En 3 Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, FM-1, FM-2, FM-3 for FM or AM. 4 To perform manual tuning, press c or d with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 5 16 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 5 To perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # You can cancel seek tuning by pressing either c or d with a quick press. # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Introduction of advanced tuner operation The tuner function menu has the following functions: BSM (best stations memory)chLIST (channel list)LOC (local seek tuning) Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Section 04 Tuner If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. 1 Press NEXT to display 16. Press NEXT until 16 appears in the display. 2 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a preset tuning button 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same preset tuning button 16 the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memory. ! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNC and then press LOC to select the local mode. 2 Press LOC to set the local seek sensitivity. Press LOC repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM: Local OFFLevel 1Level 2Level 3 Level 4 AM: Local OFFLevel 1Level 2 The Level 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. English Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. 1 Press FUNC to select BSM mode. 2 Press BSM to turn BSM on. Searching appears. The six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in order of their signal strength. When finished, Searching disappears and the display switches to the preset channel list mode. # To cancel the storage process, press BSM again. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using 16. En 17 Section 04 Tuner Selecting stations from the preset channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset stations and select one of them to receive. 1 Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2 Press any of the buttons 16 to recall the desired station frequency. Note You can also use c, d and a to select and recall the desired station. 18 En Section 05 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD # You can eject a CD by pressing CD EJECT. 2 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. English 1 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. FORM1 These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your built-in CD player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. WARNING Do not use with the front panel left open, after ejecting a CD. If you do leave it open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. 1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press CD EJECT. CD loading slot appears. # After a CD has been inserted, rotate SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. 2 Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. Front panel is closed automatically, and playback will start. CD loading slot # If you select the search method to Rough search, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every ten track in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 21.) 5 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12cm or 8-cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs. ! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ! A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play, check that the label side of the disc is up. Press CD EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again. ! If the built-in CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 65. ! When a CD TEXT disc is inserted, the disc and track titles begin to scroll to the left automatically. En 19 Section 05 Built-in CD Player Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation Playing tracks in a random order The built-in CD player function menu has the following functions: RPT (repeat play)RDM (random play) SCAN (scan play)T.LIST (track title list) PAUSE (pause)TTLin (disc title input) R.SRCH (search method)T.READ (tag display) Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. 1 Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2 Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in a random order. # To turn random play off, press RDM again. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ! T.LIST is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc. Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2 Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. # To turn repeat play off, press RPT again. Notes ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. ! When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, T.RPT appears on the basic display. 20 En Note When the random mode is exited while random play is on, RDM appears on the basic display. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2 Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desired track press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. # If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Notes ! After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, SCAN appears on the basic display. Section 05 Built-in CD Player The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2 Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. English Selecting tracks from the track title list Selecting the search method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 track. 1 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press R.SRCH to select the search method mode. 3 Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. 2 Press R.SRCH to select the search method. Press R.SRCH until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! Rough search Searching every 10 track Notes ! You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired track title. ! Only when playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch to this mode. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1 Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. Searching every 10 track in the current disc If a disc contains over 10 tracks, you can search every 10 track. When a disc contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method Rough search. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page. 2 Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. # To turn the pause off, press PAUSE again. En 21 Section 05 Built-in CD Player 2 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 track in a disc. # If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of a disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks are less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of a disc. # If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of a disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks are less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of a disc. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. If you input a CD title, the entered title is displayed. For details of operation, refer to Entering disc titles on page 36 under Multi-CD Player. can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. 1 Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2 Press the corresponding button to display the desired title. FORM1 and FORM3 Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Notes ! When playing a CD TEXT disc, if you switch to this mode, Cant input is displayed and you cannot input the title. ! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from this unit, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. ! If you connect a multi-CD player, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. Using disc title functions When playing a CD TEXT disc, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. When the text is longer than 32 letters, you 22 En Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ! You cannot use c or d to select a track in title mode. ! When you select the display FORM2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ! A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g., No artist name). ! If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, No title is displayed. Section 06 MP3/WMA Player Playing a MP3/WMA 2 3 4 CD loading slot 5 FORM1 These are the basic steps necessary to play an MP3/WMA with your built-in CD player. More advanced MP3/WMA operation is explained starting on the next page. WARNING Do not use with the front panel left open, after ejecting a CD-ROM. If you do leave it open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. 1 MP3/WMA indicator Shows when the MP3/WMA file is playing. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 3 Track number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. 4 Bit rate indicator 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track (file). 1 Press CD EJECT. CD loading slot appears. English 1 2 Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. Front panel is closed automatically, and playback will start. # You can eject a CD-ROM by pressing CD EJECT. 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 4 Press a or b to select a folder. # You cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA file recorded in it. # To return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 5 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. # This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached. # If you select the search method to Rough search, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every ten track in the current folder. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 26.) 6 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. # After a CD-ROM has been inserted, rotate SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. En 23 Section 06 MP3/WMA Player Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback of MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc. ! The built-in CD player can play back an MP3/ WMA file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 67 for files that can be played back.) ! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ! A CD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up playback and the sound being issued. This is particularly the case when playing back multi-session and many folders. When being read in, Format read is displayed. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play, check that the label side of the disc is up. Press CD EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! If inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, No Audio is displayed. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If the built-in CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 65. 24 En ! When an MP3/WMA disc is inserted, folder name and file name begin to scroll to the left automatically. Introduction of advanced built-in CD player (MP3/ WMA) operation The MP3/WMA function menu has the following functions: RPT (repeat play)RDM (random play) SCAN (scan play)F.LIST (folder title list) PAUSE (pause)TTLin (disc title input) R.SRCH (search method)T.READ (tag display) Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin), the display is not returned automatically.) ! When playing a CD-ROM disc, if you switch to the disc title input mode (TTLin), Cant input is displayed and you cannot input the title. Repeating play For MP3/WMA playback, there are three repeat play ranges: Folder repeat (folder repeat), Track repeat (one-track repeat) and Disc repeat (repeat all tracks). 1 Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. Section 06 MP3/WMA Player ! Folder repeat Repeat the current folder ! Track repeat Repeat just the current track ! Disc repeat Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select other folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to Disc repeat. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during Track repeat, the repeat play range changes to Folder repeat. ! When Folder repeat is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. ! When the repeat mode is exited, either T.RPT (one-track repeat) or FOLDER PRT (folder repeat) may appear on the basic display. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, Folder repeat and Disc repeat. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 3 Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder repeat or Disc repeat ranges. Note When the random mode is exited while random play is on, RDM appears on the basic display. English 2 Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT until the desired repeat range appears in the display. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using Folder repeat, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc repeat, the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3 Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or folder) press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or folder) will continue to play. # If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Notes ! After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, SCAN appears on the basic display. # To turn random play off, press RDM again. Pausing MP3/WMA playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the MP3/WMA. En 25 Section 06 MP3/WMA Player 1 Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2 Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. # To turn the pause off, press PAUSE again. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. Note You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired folder title. Selecting the search method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 track. 1 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press R.SRCH to select the search method mode. Selecting folders from the folder title list Folder title list lets you see the list of folder titles and select one of them to playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press F.LIST to select folder title list mode. 2 Press NEXT to display the desired folder title. Press NEXT until the desired folder title appears. 2 Press R.SRCH to select the search method. Press R.SRCH until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! Rough search Searching every 10 track Searching every 10 track in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search every 10 track. When the one folder contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method Rough search. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page. This indication shows the number of files in the selected folder. If selected folder contains no files, nothing will be displayed. 3 Press the corresponding number button to select the desired folder title. That selection will begin to play. 26 En 2 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 track in the current folder. # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks are less Section 06 MP3/WMA Player Switching the tag display It is possible to turn the tag display on or off, if MP3/WMA disc contains the text information such as track title and artist name. ! If you turn the tag display off, time to playback will be shorter than when this function is turned on. 1 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press T.READ to select the tag display mode. 2 Press T.READ to turn tag display on. # To turn the tag display off, press T.READ again. Note When you turn the tag display on, this unit returns to the beginning of the current track in order to read the text information. Using disc title functions You can switch text display such as artist name and track title. When the text is longer than 32 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. 1 2 Press the corresponding button to display the desired title. FORM1 and FORM3 Button Operation FOLDER Displays folder name. FILE Displays file name. ALBUM Displays album title. T.TTL Displays track title. ARTIST Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. English than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the folder. # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks are less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. FORM2 Button Operation F+FIL Displays folder name and file name FIL+T Displays file name and track title. ALB+T Displays album title and track title. TR+ART Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ! You cannot use a/b/c/d to select a folder or track in title mode. ! When you select the display FORM2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a MP3/WMA disc, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g., No album tilte). ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Press TITLE to switch the title mode. En 27 Section 07 Built-in MD Player Playing an MD 1 2 3 4 FORM1 These are the basic steps necessary to play an MD with your built-in MD player. More advanced MD operation is explained starting on the next page. WARNING Do not use with the front panel left open, after ejecting an MD. If you do leave it open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. 1 MDLP indicator (×2 or ×4) Shows when an MD featuring long recording is playing. 2 Group number indicator Shows the group currently playing. 3 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 4 GRP indicator Shows when a group-recorded MD is playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. # After an MD has been inserted, rotate SOURCE to select the built-in MD player. 28 En MD loading slot # You can eject an MD by pressing MD EJECT. 5 1 Press MD EJECT. MD loading slot appears. 2 Insert an MD into the MD loading slot. Front panel is closed automatically, and playback will start. 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 4 When playing a group-recorded MD, press a or b to select a group. 5 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 6 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! Do not insert anything other than an MD into the MD loading slot. ! An MD left partially inserted after ejection may incur damage or fall out. ! Load an MD after confirming the MD shutter (refer to MD player and care on page 69) is closed. ! When you load a disc, this unit reads information recorded on the disc such as the number of tracks. While the disc is being read, TOC read is indicated in the display. ! If the built-in MD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in MD player error messages on page 65. Section 07 Built-in MD Player Introduction of advanced built-in MD player operation The built-in MD player function menu has the following functions: RPT (repeat play)RDM (random play) SCAN (scan play)T.LIST (track title list) G.LIST (group title list)PAUSE (pause) Group-recorded MD For group-recorded MD playback, there are three repeat play ranges: Group repeat (group repeat), Track repeat (one-track repeat) and Disc repeat (repeat all tracks). 1 English ! When you play MDs featuring long recordings, ×2 or ×4 indicator is displayed. ! When an MD is inserted, the disc (or group) and track titles begin to scroll to the left automatically. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2 Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! Group repeat Repeat the current group ! Track repeat Repeat just the current track ! Disc repeat Repeat all tracks Notes Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. ! G.LIST is displayed only when playing a group-recorded MD. Repeating play Non group-recorded MD Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2 Press RPT to turn the repeat play on. The light illuminates. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. # To turn repeat play off, press RPT again. Notes ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. ! When the repeat mode is exited while repeat play is on, T.RPT appears on the basic display. ! If you select other group during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to Disc repeat. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during Track repeat, the repeat play range changes to Group repeat. ! When the repeat mode is exited, either T.RPT (one-track repeat) or GRP RPT (group repeat) may appear on the basic display. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the MD in a random order. ! When playing a group-recorded MD, random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, Group repeat and Disc repeat. 1 Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2 Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in a random order. # To turn random play off, press RDM again. En 29 Section 07 Built-in MD Player Note When the random mode is exited while random play is on, RDM appears on the basic display. Scanning tracks of a MD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the MD. ! When playing a group-recorded MD, while you are using Group repeat, the beginning of each track in the selected group plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc repeat, the beginning of the first track of each group is played for about 10 seconds. Selecting tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on an MD and select one of them for playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2 Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 1 Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 2 Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. # When playing a group-recorded MD, the first 10 seconds of each track of the current group (or the first track of each group) is played. 3 When you find the desired track (or group) press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or group) will continue to play. # If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Notes ! After scanning of an MD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, SCAN appears on the basic display. 30 En 3 Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Note You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired track title. Selecting groups from the group title list Group title list lets you see the list of group titles and select one of them to playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press G.LIST to select group title list mode. 2 Press NEXT to display the desired group title. Press NEXT until the desired group title appears. Section 07 Built-in MD Player 1 Press TITLE to switch the title mode. FORM1 and FORM3 This indication shows the number of tracks in the selected group. 3 Press the corresponding number button to select the desired group title. That selection will begin to play. Note You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired group title. Pausing MD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the MD. 1 Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2 Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. # To turn the pause off, press PAUSE again. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. G.TTL Displays group title. T.TTL Displays track title. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. English 2 Press the corresponding button to display the desired title. FORM2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays group title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and track title. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ! You cannot use a/b/c/d to select a group or track in title mode. ! When you select the display FORM2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ! If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, No title is displayed. ! G.TTL, TTL1 and TTL2 are displayed only when playing a group-recorded MD. Using disc title functions When playing an MD, you can switch text display such as disc title and track title. When the text is longer than 32 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. En 31 Section 08 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 2 1 5 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes 3 FORM1 You can use this unit to control a multi-CD player, which is sold separately. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your multi-CD player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. ! When the multi-CD player performs the preparatory operations, Ready is displayed. ! If the multi-CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player owners manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player magazine, No disc is displayed. ! When you select a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, the disc and track titles begin to scroll to the left automatically. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 1 Rotate SOURCE to select the multi-CD player. Rotate SOURCE until you see Multi-CD displayed. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Press a or b to select a disc. A disc number for which there is no disc will be skipped. # You can use the buttons 16 (or 712) to select a disc directly. 32 En 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-CD players. Selecting a disc directly You can use the buttons 16 (or 712) to select a disc directly. 1 Press NEXT to display 16 (or 712). Press NEXT until 16 (or 712) appears. 2 Press any of the buttons 16 (or 712) to select a disc located at 1 to 6 (or 7 to 12). Section 08 Multi-CD Player Note Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation The multi-CD player function menu has the following functions: RPT (repeat play)RDM (random play) SCAN (scan play)T.LIST (track title list) D.LIST (disc title list)PAUSE (pause) TTLin (disc title input)COMP (compression and DBE)ITS.P (ITS play)ITS.M (ITS programming) Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin) or ITS programming mode (ITS.M), the display is not returned automatically.) ! T.LIST is displayed only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player. ! Magazine repeat Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! Track repeat Repeat just the current track ! Disc repeat Repeat the current disc English You cannot display 712 when a 6-disc multi-CD player is connected. 2 Press RPT to select the repeat range. Press RPT until the desired repeat range appears in the display. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to Magazine repeat. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during Track repeat, the repeat play range changes to Disc repeat. ! When the repeat mode is exited, either T.RPT (one-track repeat) or D.RPT (disc repeat) may appear on the basic display. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, Magazine repeat and Disc repeat. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: Magazine repeat (multi-CD player repeat), Track repeat (one-track repeat) and Disc repeat (disc repeat). 1 3 Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected Magazine repeat or Disc repeat ranges. # To turn random play off, press RDM again. Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. En 33 Section 08 Multi-CD Player Note When the random mode is exited while random play is on, RDM appears on the basic display. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using Disc repeat, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using Magazine repeat, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. Selecting tracks from the track title list The track title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them for playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press T.LIST to select the track title list mode. 2 Press NEXT to display the desired track title. Press NEXT until the desired track title appears. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 3 Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track (or disc) will continue to play. # If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. 3 Press the corresponding number button to select the desired track title. That selection will begin to play. Notes ! You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired track title. ! Only when playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch to this mode. Notes ! After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, SCAN appears on the basic display. Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles that have been entered into the multi-CD player and select one of them to playback. 1 Press FUNC and then press D.LIST to select the disc title list mode. 34 En Section 08 Multi-CD Player Using ITS playlists 3 Press any of the buttons 16 (or 712) to select the desired disc title. That selection will begin to play. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Notes ! You can also use c, d and a to select and play the desired disc title. ! If no title has been entered for a disc, No D.Title will be displayed. ! No disc is displayed next to the disc number when no disc is set in the magazine. ! You cannot display 712 when a 6-disc multiCD player is connected. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1 Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2 Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. # To turn the pause off, press PAUSE again. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. English 2 Press NEXT to switch between 16 and 712. You can use ITS to enter and playback up to 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-CD players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS programming mode. 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press MEMO to store the currently playing track in the playlist. Memory complete is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. # You can also use a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. En 35 Section 08 Multi-CD Player Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 33. 2 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.P to select the ITS play mode. 3 Press ITS.P to turn ITS play on. The light illuminates. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected Magazine repeat or Disc repeat ranges. # To turn ITS play off, press ITS.P again. # If no tracks in the current range are programmed for ITS play then ITS empty is displayed. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNC. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on this page. 4 Press CLEAR to erase a track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS empty is displayed and normal play resumes. # You can also use b to erase the currently playing track from ITS playlist. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off. 1 Play a CD that you want to delete. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS programming mode. 3 Press CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and Memory deleted is displayed. # You can also use b to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from ITS playlist. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display. 2 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press ITS.M to select the ITS programming mode. 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 36 En Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 10 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi-CD player. If you input a CD title, the entered title is displayed. Section 08 Multi-CD Player 2 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press TTLin to select the disc title input mode. 3 Press ABC to select the desired character type. Press ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character type: Alphabet (upper case), numbers and symbols Alphabet (lower case) # You can select to input numbers and symbols by pressing 012. 4 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and symbols in 1 2 3 ... @ # < order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X ... C B A order. Notes ! When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, if you switch to this mode, Cant input is displayed and you cannot input the title. ! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. English 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. Press a or b to select a CD. Using disc title functions When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player, you can switch text display such as artist name and track title. When the text is longer than 32 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. 1 Press TITLE to switch the title mode. 2 Press the corresponding button to display the desired title. FORM1 and FORM3 5 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 6 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 7 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Button Operation D.TTL Displays disc title. D.ART Displays disc artist name. T.TTL Displays track title. T.ART Displays track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. FORM2 Button Operation TTL1 Displays disc title and track title. TTL2 Displays disc title and disc artist name. En 37 Section 08 Multi-CD Player Button Operation TTL3 Displays track title and track artist name. SCROLL Scrolls the displayed title. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. ! You cannot use a/b/c/d to select a disc or track in title mode. ! When you select the display FORM2, the titles are displayed up to 24 letters long. ! A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g., No artist name). ! If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, No title is displayed. Using compression and bass emphasis You can use these functions only with a multiCD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi-CD player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 38 En 1 Press FUNC and NEXT and then press COMP to select the COMP/DBE mode. # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, No COMP is displayed when you attempt to select it. 2 Press COMP to select your favorite setting. Press COMP repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFDBE 1DBE 2 Section 09 TV tuner Using the TV tuner 2 1 # You can cancel seek tuning by pressing either c or d with a quick press. English 5 To perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 3 FORM1 You can use this unit to control a TV tuner, which is sold separately. For details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuners operation manuals. This section provides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuners operation manual. 1 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 2 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 3 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 1 Rotate SOURCE to select the television. Rotate SOURCE until you see Television displayed. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, TV-1 or TV-2. 4 To perform manual tuning, press c or d with quick presses. The channels move up or down step by step. The tuner function menu has the following functions: BSSM (best stations sequential memory) chLIST (preset channel list) 1 BSSM (best stations sequential memory) Press BSSM repeatedly to turn BSSM on or off. When finished, the display switches to the preset channel list mode. 2 chLIST (preset channel list) For operation of the preset channel list, refer to Selecting channels from the preset channel list on the next page. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 16 (or 712) you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall with the touch of a button. En 39 Section 09 TV tuner 1 Press NEXT to display 16 (or 712). Press NEXT until 16 (or 712) appears. 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory press a preset tuning button 16 (or 712) and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same preset tuning button 16 (or 712) the station is recalled from memory. Notes ! Up to 12 stations, 6 for each of two TV bands can be stored in memory. ! You can also use a and b to recall broadcast stations assigned to preset tuning buttons 16 and 712. Selecting channels from the preset channel list The preset channel list lets you see the list of preset channels and select one of them to receive. 1 Press FUNC and then press chLIST to select the preset channel list mode. 2 Press NEXT to switch between 16 and 712. 3 Press any of the buttons 16 (or 712) to recall the desired channel. Note You can also use c, d and a to select and recall the desired channel. 40 En Section 10 DVD Player Playing a disc 3 # You can use the buttons 16 to select a disc directly. English 12 3 Press a or b to select a disc. A disc number for which there is no disc will be skipped. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 4 FORM1 You can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player, which is sold separately. For details concerning operation, refer to the DVD players or multi-DVD players operation manuals. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD players or multi-DVD players operation manual. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing when using a multi-DVD player. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing during DVD video playback. 3 Chapter/track number indicator Shows the chapter/track currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track. 1 Rotate SOURCE to select the DVD player. Rotate SOURCE until you see DVD displayed. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 5 To skip back or forward to another chapter (or track), press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next chapter (or track). Pressing c once skips to the start of the current chapter (or track). Pressing again will skip to the previous chapter (or track). Introduction of advanced DVD player operation The DVD player function menu has the following functions: During DVD video or Video CD playback RPT (repeat play)D.LIST (disc title list) PAUSE (pause)TTLin (disc title input) During CD playback RPT (repeat play)RDM (random play) SCAN (scan play)D.LIST (disc title list) PAUSE (pause)TTLin (disc title input) ITS.P (ITS play)ITS.M (ITS programming) Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. En 41 Section 10 DVD Player (When you select the disc title input mode (TTLin) or ITS programming mode (ITS.M), the display is not returned automatically.) ! D.LIST, TTLin, ITS.P and ITS.M are displayed only when using a multi-DVD player. Repeating play 1 Press FUNC to select the repeat mode. 2 Press RPT to select the repeat range. During DVD video playback ! Title repeat Repeat just the current title ! Chapter repeat Repeat just the current chapter ! Disc repeat Repeat the current disc During Video CD or CD playback Each press of RPT turns the repeat play on or off. Playing tracks in a random order 1 Press FUNC and then press RDM to select the random mode. 2 Press RDM to turn random play on. The light illuminates. Tracks will play in a random order. # To turn random play off, press RDM again. 2 Press SCAN to turn scan play on. The light illuminates. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desired track press SCAN to turn scan play off. The light goes off. The track will continue to play. # If the scan mode is automatically canceled, select the scan mode again. Notes ! After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When the scan mode is exited while scan play is on, SCAN appears on the basic display. Pausing disc playback 1 Press FUNC and then press PAUSE to select the pause mode. 2 Press PAUSE to turn pause on. The light illuminates. Play of the current track pauses. # To turn the pause off, press PAUSE again. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE in the following display. Note When the random mode is exited while random play is on, RDM appears on the basic display. Scanning tracks of a CD 1 Press FUNC and then press SCAN to select the scan mode. 42 En Using ITS playlist, disc title input and disc title list functions During CD playback when using this unit with multi-DVD player, you can use these functions. Operation is same as multi-CD player. Please refer to multi-CD player section. Section 11 Audio Adjustments Operation modes Important ! When no power is supplied to this unit because of an exchange of the car battery or similar, the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition. If this happens, all memorized adjusted audio settings are erased. When you have completed audio setting adjustment, be sure to record the settings on page 70. English This unit features two operation modes: the 3way network mode (NW) and the standard mode (STD). You can switch between modes as desired. Initially, the DSP setting is set to the standard mode (STD). (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 6.) ! The 3-way network mode (NW) lets you create of a 3-way multi-amp, multi-speaker system with separate speakers for reproduction of high, middle and low frequencies (bands), each driven by a dedicated power amp. The 3-way network mode provides network and time alignment functions, two functions essential for a multiamp, multi-speaker system, to enable precise control over settings for each frequency range. ! The standard mode (STD) lets you create a 4-speaker system with front and rear speakers, or a 6-speaker system with front and rear speakers and subwoofers. The standard mode provides a sound field control function offering an easy way to recreate realistic sound fields in your car. : This mark indicates a function available only in STD mode or an operation in STD mode. ! The functions and operations which do not carry either mark are commonly used in the NW and STD modes. 3-way network mode By carrying out the following settings/adjustments in order, you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ! Using the position selector (POSI) ! Using balance adjustment (BAL) ! Using the time alignment (T.AL) ! Adjusting network (NW) ! Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ! Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ 1) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer (EQ 2) Standard mode Adjusting the audio easily The following functions let you easily adjust your audio system to match the car interior acoustic characteristics which vary depending on the type of car. ! Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ! Using the position selector (POSI) ! Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ 1) Adjusting the audio finely Operation mode marks This manual uses the following marks to make the description clear. : This mark indicates a function only in NW mode or an operation in NW mode. By carrying out the following settings/adjustments in order, you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ! Using the position selector (POSI) ! Using balance adjustment (F/B) ! Using subwoofer output (SW1) En 43 Section 11 Audio Adjustments ! Adjusting subwoofer settings (SW2) ! Setting the high pass filter for front speakers (HPF F) ! Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers (HPF R) ! Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) ! Recalling equalizer curves (EEQ) ! Adjusting equalizer curves (EQ 1) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer (EQ 2) Extra functions These functions are helpful in adjusting the sound to suit your system or your personal preferences. ! Using BBE sound (BBE) ! Adjusting loudness (LOUD) ! Using sound field control and BBE sound (SFC) ! Using automatic sound levelizer (ASL) ! Adjusting source levels (SLA) Introduction of audio adjustments The audio menu has the following functions: BALNWPOSIT.ALEQ 1EQ 2BBE LOUDASLSLA F/BLOUDSFCEQ 1EQ 2ASLPOSI T.ALA.EQSW1SW2HPF FHPF R SLA Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned. (When you select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode (EQ 2), the time alignment adjustment mode (T.AL) or the network adjustment mode (NW), the display is not returned automatically.) ! SW2 is displayed only when the subwoofer output is on in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). ! SLA is not displayed when you select FM tuner as the source. Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to clearly position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automatically adjust the speakers output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display POSI. Press NEXT until POSI appears in the display. 2 Press POSI to select the position selector mode. 44 En Section 11 Audio Adjustments Button Indicator Position FL Front seat left FR Front seat right FRONT Front seats ALL All seats # To cancel the selected listening position, press the same button again. # You cannot select ALL when NW mode has been selected. Note You can also use a, b, c or d to select the listening position. Button Indicator Position c Front seat left d Front seat right a Front seats b All seats 2 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. Balance L25 Balance R25 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. English 3 Press the corresponding button to select a listening position. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select the fader/balance mode. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. Fader F25 Fader R25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. # Fader FR 00 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. Balance L25 Balance R25 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using balance adjustment You can select a balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select the balance mode. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the distance between each speaker and the listening position. En 45 Section 11 Audio Adjustments 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display T.AL. Press NEXT until T.AL appears in the display. 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display T.AL. Press NEXT until T.AL appears in the display. 2 Press T.AL to select the time alignment mode. 2 Press T.AL to select the time alignment mode. # T.AL is inactive when neither FL nor FR is selected in the position selector mode (POSI). # T.AL is inactive when neither FL nor FR is selected in the position selector mode (POSI). 3 Press the corresponding button to select the time alignment. 3 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: Button Time alignment INTL Initial A.TA Auto-time alignment CUSTM Custom # To turn time alignment off, press the same button again. # You cannot select A.TA when NW mode has been selected. # A.TA is inactive if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. 4 Press BAND to cancel the time alignment mode. Notes ! INTL is the factory supplied time alignment. ! A.TA is the time alignment created by auto TA and EQ. (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 54.) ! CUSTM is an adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself. Adjusting the time alignment You can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in CUSTM. 46 En High Left (high-range left)High Right (high-range right)Mid Right (middle-range right)Mid Left (middle-range left) Low Left (low-range left)Low Right (lowrange right) Front Left (front left)Front Right (front right)Rear Right (rear right)Rear Left (rear left)Sub. W (subwoofer) # You cannot select Sub. W when the subwoofer output is off. 4 Press a or b to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the listening position. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the distance. 400.0cm 0.0cm is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased. # You can adjust the distance for the other speakers in the same way. 5 Press BAND to cancel the time alignment mode. Section 11 Audio Adjustments The network function lets you divide the audio signal into different frequency bands, and then reproduce each of them through separate speaker units. You can then make precise adjustments to the reproduced frequency band (with a low-pass filter or high-pass filter), level, phase and other parameters to match the characteristics of each speaker unit. Adjustable parameters The network function enables adjustment of the following parameters. Make adjustments in line with the reproduced frequency band and characteristics of each connected speaker unit. Level (dB) Reproduced frequency band Pass Slope (dB/oct.) Level Frequency (Hz) Cut-off frequency of HPF Cut-off frequency of LPF Reproduced frequency band Adjusting the HPF (high-pass filter) or LPF (low-pass filter) cut-off frequency lets you set the reproduced frequency band for each speaker unit. ! The HPF cuts frequencies (low) below the set frequency, letting high frequencies through. ! The LPF cuts frequencies (high) above the set frequency, letting low frequencies through. Level The difference in reproduced levels between speaker units can be corrected. English About the network function Slope Adjusting the HPF/LPF slope (filter attenuation slope) lets you adjust the continuity of sound between speaker units. ! The slope indicates the number of decibels (dB) the signal is attenuated when the frequency is one octave higher (lower) (Unit: dB/oct.). The steeper the slope, the more the signal is attenuated. Phase You can switch phase (normal, reverse) for each speaker units input signal. When the continuity of sound between speakers is imprecise, try switching phase. This may improve the continuity of sound between speakers. Points concerning network adjustments Cut-off frequency adjustment ! With the low-range speaker installed in the rear tray, if you set the L LPF cut-off frequency high, bass sound is separated so that it appears to come from the rear. You are recommended to set the L LPF cut-off frequency to 100 Hz or lower. ! The maximum input power setting for middle- and high-range speakers is usually lower than that for low-range speakers. Remember that if the M HPF or H HPF cut-off frequency is set lower than required, strong bass signal input may damage the speaker. En 47 Section 11 Audio Adjustments Level adjustment The basic frequencies of many musical instruments are in the middle range. First perform middle-range level adjustment, followed by high-range and then low-range level adjustment in that order. ! Even if any speaker unit (filter) is muted, you can adjust the parameters for other speaker units (filters). Slope adjustment ! If you set a small absolute value for the slope (for a gentle slope), interference between adjacent speaker units can easily result in degraded frequency response. ! If you set a large absolute value for the slope (for a steep slope), continuity of sound between speaker units is degraded, and sounds appear to be separated. ! If you set the slope to 0 dB/oct. (Pass), the audio signal bypasses the filter, so the filter does not have an effect. 2 Press the corresponding button to select the speaker unit (filter) to be adjusted. Phase adjustment When the cross-over point value for filters on both sides is set to 12 dB/oct., the phase is reversed 180 degrees at the filter cut-off frequency. In this case, reversing the phase assures improved sound continuity. Normal phase Reverse phase 1 Press AUDIO and then press NW to select the network adjustment mode. Button Speaker unit (filter) L LPF Low-range speaker LPF M HPF Middle-range speaker HPF M LPF Middle-range speaker LPF H HPF High-range speaker HPF 3 Press MUTE to mute the selected speaker unit (filter). MUTE blinks in the display. # To cancel the muting, press MUTE again. Adjusting network 1 Press AUDIO and then press NW to select the network adjustment mode. 2 Press the corresponding button to select the speaker unit (filter) to be adjusted. Crossover point 48 Button Speaker unit (filter) L LPF Low-range speaker LPF M HPF Middle-range speaker HPF Muting the speaker unit (filter) M LPF Middle-range speaker LPF You can mute each speaker unit (filter). When a speaker unit (filter) is muted, no sound is output from that speaker. ! If you mute the selected speaker unit (filter), MUTE blinks and no adjustments are possible. H HPF High-range speaker HPF En 3 Press c or d to select the cut-off frequency (crossover frequency) of the selected speaker unit (filter). L LPF: 31.540506380100125 160200 (Hz) Section 11 Audio Adjustments 4 Press a or b to adjust the level of the selected speaker unit (filter). Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the selected speaker unit (filter). 0dB 24dB is displayed as the levelis increased or decreased. +6dB 24dB is displayed as the levelis increased or decreased, only if you haveselected L LPF. 5 Press SLOPE to select the slope of the selected speaker unit (filter). L LPF: 12 18 6 (dB/oct.) M HPF: 12 18Pass (0) 6 (dB/oct.) M LPF: 12Pass (0) 6 (dB/oct.) H HPF: 12 6 (dB/oct.) 6 Press PHASE to switch the phase of the selected speaker unit (filter). Each press of PHASE switches the phase between normal and reverse . # You can adjust the parameters for other speaker units (filters) in the same way. 7 Press BAND to cancel the network adjustment mode. Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be switched on or off. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn the subwoofer output on. The subwoofer output phase can be switched between normal and reverse. 1 Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW1 to select the subwoofer output mode. # SW2 is displayed only when the subwoofer output is on in the subwoofer output mode (SW1). English M HPF: 31.540506380100125 160200 (Hz) M LPF: 1.622.53.15456.38 1012.516 (kHz) H HPF: 1.622.53.15456.38 1012.516 (kHz) 2 Press SW1 to turn subwoofer output on. SUB.W ON appears in the display. Subwoofer output is now on. # To turn subwoofer output off, press SW1 again. 3 Press c or d to select the phase of subwoofer output. Press c to select reverse phase. Press d to select normal phase. Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer. 1 Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press SW2 to select the subwoofer setting mode. 2 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency. Each press of c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 506380100125 (Hz) Only frequencies lower than those in the selected range are output from the subwoofer. 3 Press a or b to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the subwoofer. +6 24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. En 49 Section 11 Audio Adjustments Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Setting the high pass filter for front speakers 1 Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press HPF F to select the high pass filter mode. 2 Press HPF F to turn high pass filter on. HPF ON appears in the display. High pass filter is now on. # To turn high pass filter off, press HPF F again. 3 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency. Each press of c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 506380100125 (Hz) Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Setting the high pass filter for rear speakers 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT twice. 2 Press HPF R to select the high pass filter mode. 3 Press HPF R to turn high pass filter on. HPF ON appears in the display. High pass filter is now on. # To turn high pass filter off, press HPF R again. 4 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency. Each press of c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 506380100125 (Hz) Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve created by auto TA and EQ (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 54). You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off. 1 Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press A.EQ to select the auto-equalizer on/off mode. # A.EQ is inactive if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. 2 Press A.EQ to turn the auto-equalizer on. Auto EQ ON appears in the display. # To turn auto-equalizer off, press A.EQ again. Recalling equalizer curves The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. There are seven stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. 1 Press EEQ to switch to the easy equalizer mode. 2 Press NEXT to switch between CSTM2 and the other selections (curves). 50 En Section 11 Audio Adjustments Button Equalizer curve CLRTY Clarity RHYTM Rhythm SENS Sensitive NRRW Narrow FLAT Flat CSTM1 Custom 1 CSTM2 Custom 2 ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer curves that you create. Adjustments can be made with a 13-band graphic equalizer. ! When FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between FLAT and a set equalizer curve. Notes ! You can also sequentially select an equalizer curve by pressing c or d. ! If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically returned. Adjusting equalizer curves The factory supplied equalizer curves, with the exception of FLAT, can be adjusted to a fine degree (nuance control). 1 Press AUDIO and then press EQ 1 to select the graphic equalizer mode. 2 Press c or d to select an equalizer curve. 3 Press a or b to adjust the equalizer curve. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the equalizer curve respectively. +6 5 (or 6) is displayed as the equalizer curve is increased or decreased. English 3 Press the corresponding button to select the desired equalizer curve. # The actual range of the adjustments are different depending on which equalizer curve is selected. # The equalizer curve with all frequencies set to 0 cannot be adjusted. Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer For CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer curves, you can adjust the level of each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD player and the multi-CD player are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM2 is selected, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM1. ! A CUSTOM2 curve can be created common to all sources. If you make adjustments when the CUSTOM2 curve is selected, the CUSTOM2 curve will be updated. 1 Recall the equalizer curve you want to adjust. See Recalling equalizer curves on the previous page. 2 Press AUDIO and then press EQ 2 to select the 13-band graphic equalizer mode. 3 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: En 51 Section 11 Audio Adjustments 50801252003155008001.25k 2k3.15k5k8k12.5k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band. +6 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. 5 Press BAND to cancel the 13-band graphice qualizer mode. Using BBE sound With BBE, playback very close to the original sound can be obtained by correction with a combination of phase compensation and high-range boost for the delay of the high-frequency components and the amplitude deviation occurring during playback. This function makes it possible to reproduce the dynamic sound field as if you are listening to a live performance. Note Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc. The mark BBE is a trademark of BBE Sound, Inc. Adjusting BBE sound level With BBE sound processing technology, you can adjust the level of BBE. 1 Press AUDIO and NEXT and then press BBE to select BBE. 2 Press BBE to turn BBE on. # To cancel the BBE, press BBE again. 52 En 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of BBE. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of BBE. +4 4 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display LOUD. Press NEXT until LOUD appears. 2 Press LOUD to select the loudness mode. 3 Press LOUD to turn loudness on. Loudness ON appears in the display. # To turn loudness off, press LOUD again. Using sound field control and BBE sound SFC (sound field control) incorporate four programs for reproducing typical sound fields of a studio, club, concert hall or dome. This function makes it possible to reproduce the realistic sound fields of the four programs in your car. With BBE, playback very close to the original sound can be obtained by correction with a combination of phase compensation and high-range boost for the delay of the high-frequency components and the amplitude deviation occurring during playback. This function makes it possible to reproduce the dynamic sound field as if you are listening to a live performance. Section 11 Audio Adjustments Note Recalling sound field programs 1 Press AUDIO and then press SFC to select the sound field control mode. 2 Press the corresponding button to select the desired sound field program. Button Effect STUDIO Studio CLUB Club HALL Concert hall DOME Dome BBE BBE # To cancel the selected sound field program, press the same button again. # You can also sequentially select a sound field program by pressing c or d. During driving, noise in the car changes according to the driving speed and road conditions. The automatic sound levelizer (ASL) monitors such varying noise and automatically increases the volume level, if this noise becomes greater. The sensitivity (variation of volume level to noise level) of ASL can be set to one of five levels. English Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc. The mark BBE is a trademark of BBE Sound, Inc. Using automatic sound levelizer 1 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display ASL. Press NEXT until ASL appears. 2 Press ASL to select the automatic sound levelizer mode. 3 Press ASL to select the desired ASL level. Each press of ASL selects ASL level in the following order: OFF (off)Low (low)Mid-Low (mid-low) Mid (mid)Mid-High (mid-high)High (high) Note Adjusting BBE sound level With BBE sound processing technology, you can adjust the level of BBE. 1 Press AUDIO and SFC and then press BBE to select BBE. 2 Press BBE to turn BBE on. # To cancel the BBE, press BBE again. 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of BBE. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of BBE. +4 4 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. When the ASL mode is exited except for OFF is selected, ASL appears on the basic display. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources. ! Settings are based on the volume level of the FM tuner, which remains unchanged. En 53 Section 11 Audio Adjustments 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO and then press NEXT to display SLA. Press NEXT until SLA appears. # SLA is not displayed when you select FM tuner as the source. 3 Press SLA to select the SLA mode. 4 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume. +4 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! Since the FM tuner volume is the control, it is not possible to apply source level adjustments to the FM tuner. ! The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! The built-in CD player and the multi-CD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. then creates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. WARNING To prevent accidents, never carry out auto TA and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer curve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be output from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carrying out auto TA and EQ under the following conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly before carrying out auto TA and EQ. When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speakers maximum input power capability. ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on battery power. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified location. Before operating the auto TA and EQ function Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and autoequalizing) The auto-time alignment automatically adjusted the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and 54 En ! Carry out auto TA and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car, or remove them from the car before carrying out auto TA and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (surrounding sounds, engine sound, telephones ringing etc.) may prevent correct Section 11 Audio Adjustments ! ! ! ! ! Carrying out auto TA and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the center of the headrest of the drivers seat, facing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto TA and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto TA and EQ. English ! measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. Be sure to carry out auto TA and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. When front speaker is not connected, auto TA and EQ cannot be carried out. When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto TA and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amps input level to the standard position. When this unit is connected to a power amp with LPF, be sure to turn LPF off and then carry out auto TA and EQ. LPF may prevent correct measurement. Auto TA and EQ changes the audio settings as below: The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 45.) The graphic equalizer curve switches to FLAT. (Refer to page 50.) When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, it will be adjusted automatically to either subwoofer output and high pass filter setting for rear speaker. If you carry out auto TA and EQ when a previous setting of this already exists, the setting will be replaced. 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the cars air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. # Rotate SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off. 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 44. # If no position is selected before you start auto TA and EQ, FR is selected automatically. 5 Rotate SOURCE until the unit turns off. to enter the auto 6 Press and hold TA and EQ measurement mode. The front panel opens automatically. # When the source is off, you can check the location of by turning on the feature demo. En 55 Section 11 Audio Adjustments 11 Press EXIT or BAND to cancel the auto TA and EQ mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on this unit. 8 Press START to start the auto TA and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is output from the speakers, and auto TA and EQ begins. # When all speakers are connected, auto TA and EQ is completed in about six minutes. # To stop auto TA and EQ, press STOP. # To cancel auto TA and EQ part way through, press EXIT or BAND. 10 When auto TA and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages on page 65.) 56 En 12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or malfunction. Section 12 Initial Settings Using the feature demo Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of different settings for this unit. The initial settings menu has the following functions: REV (reverse mode)F.DEMO (feature demo) AUX (auxiliary input)D.ATT (digital attenuator)MUTE.S (telephone muting/attenuation)FMstep (FM tuning step) AMstep (AM tuning step) The feature demo automatically starts when power to this unit is turned off while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. You can turn the feature demo on or off. 1 Rotate SOURCE until the unit turns off. and hold to enter the initial2 Press settings menu. When the source is off, you can check the location of by turning on the feature demo. English Adjusting initial settings Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle battery may be drained. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press F.DEMO to select the feature demo mode. 3 Press F.DEMO to turn the feature demo on. ON appears in the display. # To turn the feature demo off, press F.DEMO again. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. Using reverse mode If you do not perform an operation within about 30 seconds, screen indications start to reverse, and then continue reversing every 10 seconds. You can turn the reverse mode on or off. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold to select the reverse mode. Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment connected to this unit. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press AUX to select the AUX mode. 3 Press AUX to turn AUX on. ON appears in the display. # To turn AUX off, press AUX again. 2 Press REV to turn the reverse mode on. ON appears in the display. # To turn the reverse mode off, press REV again. En 57 Section 12 Initial Settings Selecting the digital attenuator When listening to a CD or other source on which the recording level is high, setting the equalizer curve level to high may result in distortion. You can switch the digital attenuator to low to reduce distortion. ! Sound quality is better at the high setting so this setting is usually used. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press D.ATT to select the digital attenuator mode. 3 Press the corresponding button to select the digital attenuator level. Button Level LOW Low HIGH High Switching the telephone muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenuated automatically when a call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. ! The sound turns off, MUTE or ATT is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone call is ended. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press MUTE.S to select the telephone muting/attenuation mode. 58 En 3 Press MUTE.S to select the desired setting. Each press of MUTE.S selects settings in the following order: TEL mute (muting) 10dB ATT (attenuation) 20dB ATT (attenuation) 20dB ATT has a stronger effect than 10dB ATT. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press NEXT and then press FMstep to select the FM tuning step mode. 3 Press the corresponding button to select the desired tuning step. Button Tuning step 50K 50 kHz 100K 100 kHz Note If seek tuning is performed in 50 kHz steps, stations may be tuned in imprecisely. Tune in the stations with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 Section 12 Initial Settings English 1,602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 1,640 kHz allowable). 1 With the source turned off, press and hold. 2 Press NEXT and then press AMstep to select the AM tuning step mode. 3 Press the corresponding button to select the desired tuning step. Button Tuning step 9K 9 kHz 10K 10 kHz En 59 Section 13 Other Functions Attenuating volume The attenuator lets you lower the volume level quickly (by about 90%). % Press ATT to turn the attenuator on. ATT appears in the display. # Press ATT again to turn the attenuator off and return to the original volume level. Displaying and setting the clock You can turn the clock display on or off and set the clock. Turning the off clock display on or off If the off clock display is turned on, when the sources and the feature demo are off, the clock display appears on the display. 1 Press NEXT to display CLK. Press NEXT until CLK appears. 2 Press CLK and then press OFF CLK to select the off clock display mode. 3 Press OFF CLK to turn the off clock display on. ON appears in the display. # To turn the off clock display off, press OFF CLK again. Setting the date The calender display adjusted in this mode appears only when sources and the feature demo are off. 60 En 1 Press NEXT to display CLK. Press NEXT until CLK appears. 2 Press CLK and then press DATE to set the date. 3 Press c or d to select the segment of the calendar display you wish to set. Pressing c or d will select one segment of the calendar display: DayMonthYear 4 Press a or b to set the date. Pressing a will increase the selected day, month or year. Pressing b will decrease the selected day, month or year. Setting the clock 1 Press NEXT to display CLK. Press NEXT until CLK appears. 2 Press CLK and then press TIME to set the clock. 3 Press c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Pressing c or d will select one segment of the clock display: HourMinute 4 Press a or b to set the clock. Pressing a will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Matching the time to a time signal 1 Press NEXT to display CLK. Press NEXT until CLK appears. 2 Press CLK and then press TIME to set the clock. Section 13 Other Functions Note Adjusting the brightness Display brightness adjustment lets you adjust the display for easier viewing when lighting conditions change. 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. During date adjustment, JUST is not displayed. 2 Press C.MENU and then press BRGHT to select the brightness mode. Setting the time signal display 3 Press c or d to adjust the brightness level. Each press of c or d increases or decreases the brightness level. 00 28 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. You can display the time signal display, which announces every full hour with a sound and ananimation. English 3 Press JUST to match the time to a time signal. If the minute is 00 29, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00.) If the minute is 30 59, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.) 1 Press NEXT to display CLK. Press NEXT until CLK appears. 2 Press CLK and then press T.SGNL to select the time signal display. Changing the display form This unit is equipped with two basic displays. You can select the desired display. 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. 2 Press C.MENU and then press D.FORM to select the display form mode. 3 Press FORM1, FORM2 or FORM3 to select the desired display form. Switching the dimmer setting To prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the cars headlights are turned on. You can switch dimmer on or off. 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. 2 Press C.MENU and then press DMMER to select the dimmer mode. 3 Press DMMER to turn the dimmer on. ON appears in the display. # To turn the dimmer off, press DMMER again. Setting the flash light screen There are four stored flash light screen to select from. En 61 Section 13 Other Functions 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. Using different entertainment displays 2 Press C.MENU and then press FLASH to select the flash light select mode. You can enjoy entertainment displays while listening to each sound source. 3 Press any of the buttons TYPE1 TYPE4 or ALL to select the desired type. When you press ALL, you can display all types sequentially. # To turn the flash light off, press OFF. Setting the movie screen There are three stored movie screens to select from. 1 Press ENT and then press MOVIE to select the movie mode. Selecting the wall paper pattern When you select display form 2 (FORM2), there are three patterns to select from. 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. 2 Press C.MENU and then press PTRN to select the wall paper pattern mode. Note The movie screen will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. 3 Press A, B or C to select the desired pattern. Setting the level indicator display Switching the font 1 Press ENT and then press S/A to select the level indicator mode. When you select display form 3 (FORM3), there are three kinds of fonts to select from. 1 Press NEXT to display C.MENU. Press NEXT until C.MENU appears. 2 Press C.MENU and then press FONT to select the font select mode. 3 Press A, B or C to select the desired font. 62 2 Press any of the buttons MOVIE1 MOVIE3 or ALL to select the desired movie. When you press ALL, you can display movies 1 to 3 sequentially. En There are three stored level indicator displays to select from. 2 Press any of the buttons S/A1 S/A3 to select the desired level indicator. Note The level indicator display will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds. Section 13 Other Functions Setting the ASL display % Press ENT and then press ASL to select the ASL display. Note The ASL display will disappear temporarily when you perform other operations, but will be displayed again after three seconds Setting the background visual When you select display form 1 (FORM1), there are five stored background visuals to select from. ! When you select FORM2, BG is not displayed and this mode is inactive. ! When you select FORM3, the background visual cannot be changed. FORM1 2 Press NEXT to switch between BGP1 BGP6 and BGP7 BGP12. 3 Press any of the buttons BGP1 BGP6 (or BGP7 BGP12) to select the desired picture. Canceling the entertainment display You can cancel the entertainment display (the movie screens, the level indicator displays, etc.). % Press ENT and then press OFF to cancel the entertainment display. Using the AUX source 2 Press any of the buttons BGV1 BGV5 to select the desired visual. An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owners manual. FORM3 Selecting AUX as the source 1 Press ENT and BG and then press BGV to select the background visual mode. % Press ENT and BGV to select the background visual. Setting the background still picture The background still pictures are only for the display form 1 (FORM1). There are 12 stored background still pictures to select from. ! When you select FORM2 or FORM3, BG is not displayed and this mode is inactive. English You can display the ASL effect level. (Refer to page 53.) 1 Press ENT and BG and then press BGP to select the background still picture mode. % Rotate SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Rotate SOURCE until AUX appears in the display. # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switching the auxiliary setting on page 57. En 63 Section 13 Other Functions Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 Rotate SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Rotate SOURCE until AUX appears in the display. 2 Press FUNC and then press TTLin to select the AUX title input mode. Refer to Entering disc titles on page 36, and perform procedures 3 to 7 in the same way. Note Even if you do not press TTLin you can enter the title, but you will not be able to change the character types. 64 En Appendix Additional Information When problems occur during CD play an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Message Cause Action ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc 17, 30 Clean disc. ERROR-11, 12, Scratched disc 17, 30 Replace disc. ERROR-10, 11, Electrical or me12, 17, 30, A0 chanical Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then back to the CD player. ERROR-22, 23 The CD format Replace disc. cannot be played back ERROR-44 All tracks are skip tracks Replace disc. Understanding built-in MD player error messages When problems occur during MD play an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Message Cause Action Blank MD Blank disc is inserted. Replace disc. TEMP The temperature of this unit is outside of the normal operating range Wait until the units temperature returns to within normal operating limits. ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc 17, 30 Clean disc. ERROR-11, 12, Scratched disc 17, 30 Replace disc. ERROR-01, 11, Electrical or me12, 17, 30, A0, chanical A1 Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then back to the MD player. ERROR-20, 21 English Understanding built-in CD player error messages Track information Reload the MD. cannot be read. ERROR-20, 21, There is someReplace disc. 24 thing wrong with the MD. ERROR-23 The MD contains Replace disc. recorded information other than music. ERROR-A1 Electrical or mechanical ERROR- MD play not pos- Replace disc, or sible. press RESET. Press RESET. Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto TA and EQ, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. After checking, try again. En 65 Appendix Additional Information Message Cause Action Error check MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error check front SP, Error check FL SP, Error check FR SP, Error check RL SP, Error check RR SP, Error check SW The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of any speaker. ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly. ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly. Error check noise The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quite as possible, and switch off the engine, air conditioner or heater. ! Set the microphone correctly. A.TA&EQ una- The operation vailable mode set to NW mode. The auto TA and EQ function does not work in NW mode. CD player and care ! Use only CDs that have either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as shown below. 66 En ! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs. ! To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc. ! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs MP3 and WMA files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! En English ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the car. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. nology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly. With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. This unit allows playback of MP3/WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. MP3/WMA files are not compatible with packet write data transfer. The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3 or .wma), is 32 characters from the first character. The max. number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 32 characters. In case of files recorded according to the Romeo and Joliet file system, only the first 32 characters can be displayed. When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA. The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However, there also is some writing software which permits setting of the playback order. 67 Appendix Additional Information Important ! When naming an MP3 or a WMA file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3 or .wma). ! This unit plays back files with the filename extension (.mp3 or .wma) as an MP3 or a WMA file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3 or WMA files. About folders and MP3/ WMA files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA files on it is shown below. Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title) and artist (track artist). ! Only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back, the emphasis function is valid. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO format. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally becomes better with increasing bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy a certain sound quality, it is recommended to use only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! Only when WMA files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with increasing bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 192 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy a certain sound quality, it is recommended to use discs recorded with a higher bit rate. 68 En 1 2 3 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number.) Appendix Additional Information ! Do not use MDs with labels that are not affixed correctly. Labels like this may catch on something, preventing removal of the MD. Before using an MD, remove the label if it is not correctly affixed, and replace it with a new label. English ! MP3/WMA files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folder on one disc. MD player and care ! Use MDs bearing this mark. Using a disc other than a music MD may result in damage to this unit. ! Do not open the MD shutter by hand. Forcing it open may result in damage. Shutter ! Keep MDs out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! If the surface of an MD cartridge is dirty, wipe it gently with a clean, soft cloth. ! Do not apply benzene, thinner or other volatile liquids to MDs. ! When using an MD cleaning disc, be sure to read the discs instructions carefully. Cleaning discs may result in damage to this unit. ! When its cold, if you start playing an MD immediately after switching the heater in a room on, condensation on the optical lens inside the player or on the MD may prevent normal play. If this happens, turn off the player for about an hour to allow the condensation to evaporate, and wipe damp MD cartridge surfaces with a soft cloth. ! Be sure to stick labels supplied with MDs in the specified location. Failing to do this, or sticking one label on top of another may make it impossible for the MD to be removed. En 69 Appendix Additional Information DSP adjustment value record sheet 3-way network mode Network setting Filter L LPF M HPF M LPF H HPF Cutoff frequency Level Slope Phase Time alignment setting Speaker unit High Left High Right Mid Left Mid Right Low Left Low Right Distance Standard mode Network setting Filter SW1 (SW2) HPF F HPF R Level Phase Cutoff frequency Time alignment setting Speaker unit Front Left Front Right Rear Left Rear Right Sub. W Distance Equalizer curves CUSTOM2 curve Frequency Level 70 En 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1.25k 2k 3.15k 5k 8k 12.5k Appendix Additional Information Terms ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artists name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters.) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark . and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. English Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. m3u Playlists created using the WINAMP software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions in one disc. Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But to flexibly adjust the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compression priorities sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. En 71 Appendix Additional Information Specifications General Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W × H × D): Chassis ............................... 178 × 100 × 160 mm Nose ..................................... 169 × 94 × 17 mm Weight .......................................... 2.5 kg Audio/DSP Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4 Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 1.8 V/1 kW Loudness contour ................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB (10 kHz) (volume: 30 dB) Equalizer (13-Band Graphic Equalizer): Frequency .......................... 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ........ ±12 dB Auto equalizer (just for standard mode): Frequency .......................... 50/80/125/200/315/500/800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz Equalization range ........ +6 12 dB Network (standard mode): HPF (Front/rear): Frequency ................ 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope .......................... 12 dB/oct Subwoofer: Frequency ................ 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope .......................... 18 dB/oct Gain ............................ +6 24 dB Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse Network (3-way network mode): High HPF: Frequency ................ 1.6/2/2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/10/ 12.5/16 kHz Slope .......................... 6/12 dB/oct Gain ............................ 0 24 dB/Mute Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse 72 En Mid HPF/LPF: Frequency (LPF) ... 1.6/2/2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/10/ 12.5/16 kHz Frequency (HPF) ................................. 31.5/40/50/63/80/100/125/ 160/200 Hz Slope (LPF) ............. 0 (Pass)/6/12 dB/oct Slope (HPF) ............ 0 (Pass)/6/12/18 dB/oct Gain ............................ 0 24 dB/Mute Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse Low LPF: Frequency ................ 31.5/40/50/63/80/100/125/ 160/200 Hz Slope .......................... 6/12/18 dB/oct Gain ............................ +6 24 dB/Mute Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse CD player System .......................................... Compact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16; linear Frequency characteristics ... 5 20,000 Hz (±1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 94 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range ......................... 92 dB (1 kHz) Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7 & 8 MD player System .......................................... Mini disc digital audio system Usable discs .............................. Mini disc Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16; linear Frequency characteristics ... 20 20,000 Hz (±1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 90 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range ......................... 90 dB (1 kHz) Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo) FM tuner Frequency range ...................... 87.5 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 10 dBf (0.9 µV/75 W, mono) Appendix Additional Information English Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IEC-A network) Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) Frequency response ............... 30 15,000 Hz (±3 dB) Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz) AM tuner Frequency range ...................... 531 1,602 kHz (9 kHz) 530 1,640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IEC-A network) Infrared remote control Wavelength ................................. 940 nm ±50 nm Output ........................................... typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Notes ! US and foreign patents licensed from Dolby Laboratories. ! Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. En 73 ©( t$ÈD D l t üT ¬Ü½Èä. t X ,x ¬©D t t ¬© $ | 8X }´ üíÜ$. ¬© $ | ä }@ ÄÐÄ tÄX 8p| t H\ ¥Ð ô XíÜ$. ¬©X0 Ð t ¬© $ Ð Xì 77 üX ¬m 77 0¥ 77 WMAÐ Xì 78 DSP $ ¨Ü\ XX0 78 Ètl\\8 ¬KX0 78 p¨ ¨ÜÐ Xì 79 í)¥ ¨Ü 79 0¥ p¨ 79 0ø ¤tÐ Xì 79 ¸ ¤ Ù 80 ä 0¥ ¼X 0¥ XX0 80 ä 0¥ ¼ ÙX 80 BAND ¼ü BACK ¼X (t 81 ¤ H´ \Ü 82 ¤t Ä $ 82 ¬¨è ¬© ¬ 83 00¬ ½ X0 83 00¬ P´X0 83 ¬¨è ¬©X0 84 FUNCTION ¼ AUDIO ¼ 84 8 m äÜ Û 85 ¬¨è 86 Ð 0/D0 00 Ð 0 87 LÐ ÝX0 87 00 Ð D0 87 |$ èX0 88 à ¬© ) 88 )¡ ü ¥ ÝX0 89 \ à8Ð \ ü Ý 89 ¥ \ | ¡X )¡m ü ¥X0 89 74 Ko ¬ $ D ©]Ð )¡m 0 90 ÝX ´¥ CD t´ CD ¬ÝX0 91 à ´¥ CD t´ Ù ) 92 ¬Ý õX0 92 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 92 CDX ¸ ¤X0 92 ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ Ý 93 CD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 93 É ) ÝX0 93 ¬ ¤lÐ ä 10X ¸Èä ÉX 0 94 ¤l © %X0 94 ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 94 MP3/WMA t´ MP3/WMA ¬ÝX0 96 à ´¥ CD t´(MP3/WMA) Ù ) 97 ¬Ý õX0 97 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 98 ôT@ ¸ ¤ 98 MP3/WMA ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 99 ôT © ©]Ð ôT ÝX0 99 É ) ÝX0 99 ¬ ôTÐ ä 10X ¸Èä ÉX 0 100 Üø ¤t XX0 100 ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 100 ´¥ MD t´ MD ¬ÝX0 102 à ´¥ MD t´ Ù ) 103 ¬Ý õX0 103 øù T)À J@ MD 103 øù T) MD 103 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 103 MDX ¸ ¤X0 104 ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ Ý 104 ©( @ð CD t´ CD ¬ÝX0 106 ¤l 50 ¥ ©ÉX @ð CD t´ 106 ¤l Á ÝX0 106 à @ð CD t´ Ù ) 107 ¬Ý õX0 107 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 107 CD@ ¸ ¤ 108 ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ Ý 108 ¤l © ©]Ð ¤l ÝX0 109 CD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 109 ITS ¬Ý ©] ¬©X0 109 ITS \ø<\ ¬Ý ©] Ìä 0 109 ITS ¬Ý ©] ¬Ý 110 ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð ¸ X 0 110 ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð CD X 0 110 ¤l © %X0 111 ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 112 U L T ¬©X0 112 TV TV ¬©X0 113 TV à ¬© ) 113 )¡m ¥ ÝX0 114 ¬ $ D ©]Ð D ÝX 0 114 DVD t´ ¤l ¬ÝX0 115 à DVD t´ Ù ) 115 ¬Ý õX0 116 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 116 CDX ¸ ¤X0 116 ¤l ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 116 ITS ¬Ý ©], ¤l © %, ¤l © ©] 0¥ t©X0 116 $$ p Ù ¨Ü 117 Ù ¨Ü Èl 117 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü 117 117 \ ¨Ü } $$ pX0 117 8<\ $$ pX0 117 0¥ 118 $$ p ) 118 X Ý 0¥ ¬©X0 118 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 119 119 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 Ü , 0¥ t©X0 119 Ü , 0¥ pX0 120 $¸Ìl 0¥Ð Xì 121 p ¥\ ä À 121 $¸Ìl p ( À 121 ¤<ä 00(D0) LpX0 122 $¸Ìl pX0 122 °| % ¬©X0 123 °| $ pX0 123 Xt (¤ D0 ¬©X0 123 ) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $ X0 124 Ä) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $ X0 124 Ù t|t ¬©X0 124 t|t á ÝX0 124 t|t á p 125 13 4Ü ø= t|t pX0 125 BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X0 126 BBE ¬´Ü ¨ pX0 126 ¬´Ü T 0¥ pX0 126 L¥ ´@ BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X0 126 L¥ \ø¨ ÝX0 126 BBE ¬´Ü ¨ pX0 127 Ù ¬´Ü ¨ p 0¥ ¬©X0 127 LÐ ¨ pX0 127 Ko \ øù © ©]Ð ¤l ÝX0 104 MD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 105 ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 105 75 ©( Ù TA EQ(Ù Ü , Ù t |t ) 128 Ù TA EQ 0¥D X0 Ð 128 Ù TA EQ X0 129 0 $ 0 $ pX0 131 í)¥ ¨Ü ¬©X0 131 0¥ p¨ ¬©X0 131 ôp $ X 131 À8 Ä 0¥ ÝX0 132 T Lp/Ä XX0 132 FM Ý © $X0 132 AM Ý © $X0 133 0À 0¥ üh Ä 134 ÜÄ ¤t $X0 134 ÜÄ ¤t ÙXp èX 0 134 Ü $X0 134 ÜÄ $X0 134 ÜD Ü à8Ð Qܤ0 134 Ü à8 ¤t $X0 135 ¤t Ý À½X0 135 Ä pX0 135 0 p $ XX0 135 Ü |t¸ Tt $X0 136 0½ (4 Ý 136 4 XX0 136 ä\ Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t ¬©X 0 136 T Tt $X0 136 ¨ \Ü ¤t $X0 137 ASL ¤t $X0 137 1ø|´Ü Dü¼ $X0 137 1ø|´Ü À Á $X0 137 Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t èX 0 137 AUX LÐ ¬©X0 138 AUX LÐ ÝX0 138 76 Ko AUX © $X0 138 ô ´¥ CD t´ Ðì TÜÀ 139 ´¥ MD t´ Ðì TÜÀ 139 Ù TA EQ Ðì TÜÀ ttX0 139 CD t´@ ¬ 140 CD-R/CD-RW ¤l 141 MP3 WMA | 141 MP3 ô 142 WMA ô 142 ôT MP3/WMA |Ð Xì 142 MD t´@ ¬ 143 DSP p TÜ Ü¸ 144 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü 144 \ ¨Ü 144 t|t á 144 ©´ 145 ¬ 146 ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð t ¬© $ Ð Xì üX ¬m ! Ù üX ¬mÐ \ 8p Ì \ t ¬© $ | ¬©X0 ¸¬\ ó Ð ô t üíÜ$. ! Ù( xX ¬ ä´ Ä] 00X ühD mÁ © ®´ üíÜ $. ! t 00| µ0Ð xܤÀ ÈíÜ$. ! 00¬ » ð°p D ) ½° ¬ $ 0µt ÀÌÀÀ\ äÜ $t| iÈä. ! t 00 ,t ÙXÀ JD ½° ät L´ t$ÈD D¤ <0 Ð 8Xt üíÜ$. \ t 00 ð´ à ¥%ü 1¥D õX Î@ 0¥äD ø ¹Õ<\ Xà µÈä. ¨à 0¥ät ©tX ¬©` Ä] $ Ä È< ¹Ä\ $ t D\ 0¥äÄ ÎµÈä. t ¬© $ X $ <\ X ¬x 0¥D © ¬©h<\h \àX ÌqD »<ä D Èä. t 00| ¬©X0 Ð ¬© $ | © X }<à ÄÐ 0¥ü Ù )D ÀX t ÁiÈä. ¹ t tÀÐ ´©ü äx 9XX üX ¬mD üXt } ´ üÜà ÜÜ t üíÜ$. ! t X õ@ xtà DÁÅx ¬©Ð \ |t<¤ÌD XøX t p Ì $$ ü8 $$ Q© \ø¨ü t ´ \ ÁÅx ©(äÜ ÐXt u =), äÜ )¡(ÀÁ, 1, t 0À äx ø´), x0 7, x¸|7 0À $¸Ìl| µ\ ) ¡/¤¸¬D t t D ¬©` 0 À ´ \ ¬Ð t |t<¤| õ Xp øì\ ¬| ìX D Xø XÀ JµÈä. tì\ ¬©Ð t Žx |t<¤ DiÈä. ôä 8\ ´©@ http://www.mp3licensing.comD )8 t üíÜ$. WMA | ¬Ý CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW(ISO9660 ¨ 1/ ¨ 2 \ T))Ð WMA |D ¬Ý ` µÈä. ¥Ü T) 0¥D ©\ MDX ¬Ý t 00 MDLP@ 8X0 L8Ð ¥Ü T) 0¥D ©\ MD| ¬Ý` µ Èä. ! MDLP | MDÐ t tÐ ¥ X ôä 20 40Ð L´ Ü 8 t\ T)D ¥X t ü pt0 U ܤ\ Èä. øù T) MD ¬Ý øù T) MD| ¬©Xt ÐX øùÄ (h, Dð¤¸, ¨ ã á ñ)\ ¸D ¬Ý` µÈä. 0¥ CD ¬Ý LE CD/CD-R/CD-RW ¬Ýt ä. ¥iÈ MP3 | ¬Ý CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW(ISO9660 ¨ 1/ ¨ 2 \ T))Ð MP3 |D ¬Ý` µÈä. Ko 77 ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð WMAÐ Xì ½à t 00Ð 3èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü© ¤<ä ܤ\ t ð°ÈD L t 00| \ ¨ÜÐ ¬© XÀ ÈíÜ$. t ½° ¤<ä Á Ä µÈä. ¤ Ð xÄ Windows Media" \à t 00 WMA pt0| ¬Ý` LD \ÜiÈä. WMA Windows Media AudioX }´tp Microsoft CorporationÐ \ $$ U 0 D XøiÈä. WMA pt0 Windows Media Player 7, 7.1 Windows Media Player for Windows XP | ¬©t xT)` µÈä. Microsoft, Windows Media, Windows \ à øm 0À m ´Ð Microsoft CorporationX Á\ ñ] Á\ Èä. 8à ! WMA |D xT) X0 t ¬© ¹ Q©\ø¨Ð t t 00 ,t ÙXÀ JD Ä µÈä. ! WMA |D xT) X0 t ¬© ¹ Q©\ø¨Ð t h tü äx M ¤¸ ô ,t ¤t À JD Ä µÈä. % t 00X !tÐ DSP ¤X| X X$t ä \ ¬ Ü|t| ¬ ©t üíÜ$. Ètl\\8 ¬KX0 Ètl\\8 äLü @ ½°ÐÌ ¬ Kt| iÈä: ! t 00| Ù(Ð ¥)Xà \\ ¬©X0 Ð ! t 00 \ ÙXÀ J ½° ! ¤tÐ tÁ\ TÜÀ 9@ U \ TÜÀ À ½° % ]t °q\ Äl\ äÜ RESETD ì üíÜ$. DSP $ ¨Ü\ XX0 t 00 P À Ù ¨Ü| õiÈä: 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü(NW) \ ¨Ü (STD). ÐX \ ¨Ü ¬t| X` µÈä. 0Ð DSP $@ \ ¨Ü (STD)\ À´ µÈä. ! X ÄÐ Ètl\\8| ¬Ki Èä. 78 Ko RESET ¼ ÛX ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð p¨ ¨ÜÐ Xì t 00 P À p¨ ¨Ü| õiÈä. X í)¥ ¨Ütp äx X 0¥ p ¨ ¨Ü Èä. ! LÐt ¼8 ät 0¥ ¨Ü| ÙÜ´ <\h 5@ 6X X| Ux` µÈ ä. 0ø ¤tÐ Xì t 00Ð 8 À ÜX 0ø ¤t ¥)´ µÈä. ¬© ÐX ¤ t| Ý` µÈä. \ FORM1 t 00X É (ACC)@ ÜÙ ¤XX ON/ OFF Ùü Ù0T èÐ ð°t| iÈä. t XÀ J<t Ù( 00¬ D ¨ µÈä. FORM2 í)¥ ¨Ü 30 É ÙXÀ Jät TtÐ í) ¥ ÄD Ü\ä ¬äD L¬à ø ÄÐ ä 10Èä í)¥ ÄD ÄiÈä. t 0 0Ð \ Ðt ¼8 D L ÜÙ ¤X ACC ON XÐ $´ ½°, + ¼ 5| tt í)¥ ¨Ü è)È ä. äÜ + ¼ 5| tt í)¥ ¨Ü Ü)Èä. FORM3 8à 8\ ´©@ 135 tÀX ¤t Ý À ½X0| 8pt üíÜ$. 0¥ p¨ ÜÙ ¤X ACC ON XÐ $ ´ ½°, 00X ÐD D t 0¥ p¨ Ù<\ Ü)Èä. t 0¥ p¨ Ù Ð + ¼ 6D tt 0¥ p¨ ¨ Ü è)Èä. äÜ + ¼ 6D tt 0¥ ¨Ü Ü)Èä. Ù ÔÄt ¼L pÄ 0¥ ¨Ü Ä ÙXt 00¬ Ðt D ¨ µÈä. Ko 79 ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð ¸ ¤ Ù 8à ¸ ¤ Ù@ \ ¼X 0¥t TtÐ ¤t \ ì|À D XøiÈ ä. ä 0¥ ¼ä@ ¸ ¤ ÙD õiÈä. , t ¼äÐ Xt 0 ¥ä@ Ý tù 0¥ $Ð 0| ì |À )Èä. 0¥ t ä 0¥ ¼ t ¬© $ Ð Ü $ @ FORM1 ¤tÐ 0iÈä. FORM2 FORM3D Ýät ä 0¥ ¼ | ¬© $ Ð \Ü ü ä| Ä µÈä. t ¬© $ Ð ä 0¥ ¼D ¬©X ÙÐ t ¤t 0¥@ 0¥ ¼X t<\ ¬©)Èä. ä 0¥ ¼X 0¥ XX0 d \Ü ä 0¥ ¼t ¬ ¤t ü äx 0¥D Àà ä D ôì Èä. \Ü ô| LÐ ä 0¥ ¼X 0¥D XX0 t NEXT| ì ü íÜ$. % ÐX 0¥D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$(. ´¥ CD t ´). NEXT| õt tt äL 0¥ät \ X)Èä: 80 Ko ! X 0¥t ¤tX Ý LÐt TtÐ 0| ì|È È ä. ! \ ¼Ð t 0¥t \ÜÀ JD L t ù ¼t ¬ \1TÀ J@ Èä. ä 0¥ ¼ ÙX ä 0¥ ¼X ÙD $ X0 \ \ ´¥ CD t´X 4 ¬Ý 0¥D $ iÈä. 1 FUNCD ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. FUNCt À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ $. 2 0¥ Tt| \ÜX$t FUNCD ì ü íÜ$. 0¥ Tt\ XXt ä 0¥ ¼X 0¥ Ä ÙÜÐ À½)Èä. 3 4 ¨Ü| üíÜ$. ÝX$t RDMD ì ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð 4 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \ \Üñt ÑÈä. # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. 5 0¥ TtÐ $t BACKD ì ü íÜ$. t 0¥ TtÐ $t ä 0¥ ¼X 0 ¥Ä ÙÜÐ À½)Èä. 8à ! 4 ¨ÜÐ a b| ì 4 ¬ÝD Ù è` µÈä. ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. BAND ¼ü BACK ¼X (t BAND ¼ BAND ¼D tt Ü ¬ Tt ¨Ü èp 0ø ¤t\ ÌDÈä. ! LÐt TDtà Tt ¨Ü ÝÀ JXD L BAND ¼D t t 4Ü X)Èä. BACK ¼ BACK ¼D tt ¬ Tt ¨Ü| è Xà tÐ Ý Tt ¨Ü\ ÌD Èä. Ko 81 ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð ¤t (. ´¥ CD t´) + ¬X Tt ¨D \ÜiÈä. ¤ H´ \Ü 8à t 00X ¤tÐ ¤ H´ \Ü õ)Èä. t@ ¬© a/b/c/d ¼ ´ \ D ¬©` À \ÜiÈä. \ 0¥ Tt, $$ Tt 0À Tt Ð 0¥D Ùܤp èܤà õ ÝD XXp äx ÙD X0 t a/b/c/d ¼ ´¤ D ¬©` À } L Ä] t Èä. t ¬© $ Ð ¨ÜÐ \ Ù@ ü \ ä 0¥ ¼D µt $ )Èä. øì ¨ÜÐ ¤ H´ \ÜÐ t ä´ TDL ¨Ü | Ùܤ0 t a/b/c/d| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ¤t Ä $ T } ¬©X0 t t ( Ä| p ` µÈä. ¤ H´ \Ü 82 Ko ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð ½à ! t (D ô´ T D ¬©XÀ ÈíÜ$. t (D ô´ Pt ¬à ÝD L ÁD D µÈä. ! t (D ôp ëD L t (Ð }t |À JÄ] üXXíÜ$. ¬¨è ¬© ¬ 00¬ ½ X0 ´ ¬¨è ·tX ä| ôà ù(+)ü Lù(-)Ð Þ° U\ )¥<\ 00¬| ½ XíÜ$. \ % Ä| À½X$t ANGLED ì üíÜ $. ANGLED | LÈä Ä À½)Èä. 00¬ P´X0 00¬| pXíÜ$. 8à ! ¤l <\ ½ ÁÜÐ Ä| p` ƵÈä. ! ANGLED Ä tt t (D ôp ë D µÈä. ½à 00¬| ´°tX t ÿÀ J óÐ ô X íÜ$. Ì| 00¬| ¼0ät Ü X¬| > D üíÜ$. üX ! CR2032 (3 V) ¬¬ 00¬ XÌD ¬©X íÜ$. ! ¬¨èD \ ì tÁ ¬©XÀ JD ½° 00 ¬| pXíÜ$. ! 00¬| ), t, ôXp Ð # À ÈíÜ$. ! Äl\ 00¬| èXÀ ÈíÜ$. Ko 83 ¥ 01 ¬©X0 Ð ! <´@ 00¬| hØ ô XÀ Èí Ü$. ! 00¬Ð at Xì , ½° ¬¨èD hWt Xà È 00¬| ½ XíÜ$. ! ¬©\ 00¬| Ð0` ½° tù m ÀíX Ü õõ X½ è´X 0 D XíÜ$. X Ùü ä Èä. äÜ ÛD Ù` L \ Tt| ÝX0 t FUNC ¼ü AUDIO ¼D ¬©\ Ä ¨Ü| ÝX0 t ä 0¥ ¼D ¬©XíÜ$. øì ¬ ¨èD Ùܬ LÐ ¨Ü| ÝX0 t $ \ \ ¨Ü| Xt| iÈä. FUNCTION ¼ Ù ¬¨è ¬©X0 ! Pµ ¬à ØD )ÀX0 t ´ | p X ÙH t 00| ÙܤÀ ÈíÜ$. ! ´ Ð <X t 00| ÙÜ| X ½°Ð Pµ ¬à| <X0 t ) D üXJ QÜXÜ0 Èä. ! Ì| äLü @ 8 Ý\ät t 00 X ¬©D Ü èXà l \ läÐ Á ôt üíÜ$: 00Ð ð0 L. 00Ð DÁx ÄÈ L. t<Èt 00Ð ä´ D L. 00 \tt ´Ð a´ ä´ D L. Ì| D| À Jà 00 ¬©D Ä\ä t 00Ð ì\ Át , à ø °ü \ ì\ ¬à T¬ Ý` Ä µÈ ä. ! t 00| Ù( ´Ð )X(àÀ J@ ÁÜ\)XÀ ÈíÜ$. Ù( ÀXp ä| Ì L 00 åÐ ¨´ È Ä µÈä. 00 tl ì D\ tì ä´ t ´ tl ÙD ` Æ ´ ì\ 8 Ý` Ä µÈ ä. t 00| ´ Ð ¼¼X àÜ üíÜ$. ! t 00| tXp pXÀ ÈíÜ$. t ½° à¥t Ý` µÈä. FUNCTION ¼ AUDIO ¼ ¬¨è ÁX FUNCTION ¼ü AUDIO ¼ @ äÜ Û ÁX FUNC ¼ü AUDIO ¼ 84 Ko % ÐX ¨Ü| ÝX0 t FUNCTIOND ì üíÜ$(. ´¥ CD t´). FUNCTIOND õt tt äL ¨Üät \ X)Èä: RPTRDMSCANT.LISTPAUSETTLin R.SRCHT.READ 8à 92 tÀX à ´¥ CD t´ Ù ) | 8pt üíÜ$. AUDIO ¼ Ù % ÐX ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO| ì üíÜ$. AUDIO| õt tt äL ¨Üät \ X)Èä: BALNWPOSIT.ALEQ 1EQ 2BBE LOUDASLSLA F/BLOUDSFCEQ 1EQ 2ASLPOSI T.ALA.EQSW1SW2HPF FHPF R SLA 8à 118 tÀX $$ p ) | 8pt ü íÜ$. ¥ 02 8 m 2 3 1 4 5 \ 6 7 äÜ 8 Û 1 ANGLE ¼ ¤t Ä| À½` L ì üíÜ $. 2 ä 0¥ ¼ Ý 0¥t $Ð 0| ì| ÑÈä. 3 CD EJECT ¼ ´¥ CD t´Ð CD| ¼¼ L ì üíÜ$. 4 MD EJECT ¼ ´¥ MD t´Ð MD| ¼¼ L ì üíÜ$. 5 RESET ¼ Ètl\\8| ¬K` L ì üíÜ $. 6 NEXT ¼ ä 0¥ ¼X 0¥äD XX0 t ì üíÜ$. 7 BACK ¼ t ¨Ü\ ÌD 9 a b 8 SOURCE @0 t 00 LÐD ÝXt ÑÈä. SOURCE| tt e ½<\ U¥´ } ܬ µÈä. SOURCE| ܤ$t äÜ ì üíÜ$. ¬© ¥ \ ¨à LÐäD (@\ ©X0 t Ü üíÜ$. 9 a/b/c/d ¼ t ¼D tt Ù É Ý, h¬ 0, 0, ¸ É ´| iÈä. 0¥ ´| tÄ ¬©` µÈä. a VOLUME VOLUMED tt e ½<\ U¥´ } ܬ µÈä. VOLUMED ܤ$t äÜ ì üíÜ$. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. b BAND ¼ 3X FM 4Ü@ 1X AM 4Ü Ð ÝXà ìì À 0¥X ´ ¨Ü| è ` L ì üíÜ$. $t ì üíÜ$. Ko 85 ¥ 02 8 m c b g 9 d e f ¬¨è ¬¨è Ù@ t X ¼D ¬©` L@ Ù|iÈä. c ATT ¼ } 90%\ üh ¨D àX ® L ì üíÜ$. \ T tt Ð üh ¨\ ÌDÈä. d VOLUME ¼ ühD tp ® L ì üíÜ$. e FUNCTION ¼ ìì À 0¥D Ý` L ì üíÜ$. f AUDIO ¼ ä\ ¬´Ü È ´| iÈä. Ý` L ¬© g SOURCE ¼ t 00 LÐD ÝXt ÑÈä. ¬© ¥\ ¨à LÐäD (@\ ©X0 t ì üíÜ$. 8à BAND| x ÁÜÐ ¬¨èX FUNCTIOND ÙÜÐ tt ¬¨èt \ ÙXÀ JD µÈä. t $D èX$t BAND| x ÁÜÐ ¬¨èX AUDIO| ÙÜÐ tt t $<\ ÌDÈä. 86 Ko ¥ 03 Ð 0/D0 00 Ð 0 % 00| 0 t äÜ ÛX SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. LÐD ÝXt 00X Ðt ÑÈä. # ¬¨èD ¬©` L 00X ÐD 0 t SOURCE| ì üíÜ$. ÝX0 è` LÐD Ý` µÈä. ´¥ CD t´\ XX$t t 00Ð CD| ½ iÈä (91 tÀ| 8pt üíÜ$). ´¥ MD t´\ XX$t t 00Ð MD| ½ iÈä (102 tÀ| 8pt üíÜ$). % LÐD ÝX0 t äÜ ÛX SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. SOURCE| õt tt äL LÐät \ X)Èä: TDDVD t´/ä DVD t´´¥ CD t´@ð CD t´´¥ MD t´x 00 1x 00 2AUXLÐ D0 \ LÐ D XøiÈä. t 00\ P À x 00 | ´` µÈä. P À x00 ð° ½°, t 00Ð Ù<\ x00 1 x00 2| $iÈä. ! 00X É t Ù(X Ù HL Ä 0 ´ èÐ ð° ½°, t 00X LÐ D \ ÝXt ÙX HL )Èä. HL| ܤ0 t DÌ äx LÐ<\ XiÈä. 00 Ð D0 % 00| D$t äÜ ÛX SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. ¬¨è ¬© Ü SOURCE| tà 00 ¼ À0 LÀ Ä x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ $. # ¬¨è ¬© Ü SOURCE| õt ì ü íÜ$. 8à ! äLü @ ½° LÐt À½À JµÈä. LÐÐ tùX ¥X t 00Ð ð° ´ À J@ ½° 00Ð ¤l ½ ´ À J@ ½° DVD t´Ð ¤l ½ ´ À J@ ½° @ð CD t´ ´Ð © ¥X ½ ´ À J@ ½° @ð DVD t´ ´Ð © ¥X ½ ´ À J@ ½° AUX(ôp %) ¼Ð<\ $´ ½°(131 tÀ| 8pt üíÜ$). ! x 00 LÐ<\ 8Xt À JT |Ä t 00\ 0ø 0¥äD ´` t$ÈD (Ä l ¥\ ñ) Ko 87 ¥ 04 |$ èX0 1 2 34 1 | ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. Tuner ¤t LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. 5 FORM1 äL ü@ |$| ÙX0 \ 0ø x èÄä Èä. t tÀÐ Ù ) t ôä 8X $ ´ µÈä. t 00| ø Àí, ø Àí, ¨ø ÀíÐ ¬©` ½° AM Ý èÄ| äÜ $t| i Èä (133 tÀX AM Ý © $X0| 8pt üíÜ$). 1 4Ü \Ü |$ AM FM ´ 4ÜÐ Þ° 8 À \ÜiÈä. 2 LOC \Ü Àí )¡m É Ýt äÜ Èä. L \Ü) 3 ¬ $ 8 \Ü Ý\ ¬ $ ´©t \Ü)Èä. 4 ¤L$(5) \Ü Ý\ üX ¤L$ )¡ ì| \ ÜiÈä. 5 ü \Ü Ð $ ü| \ÜiÈä. 3 4Ü| ÝX$t BAND| ì üíÜ $. ÐX 4Ü ¤t LLÀ BAND| ì üíÜ$. FMX ½° FM-1, FM-2, FM-3 (@\ ¤tp, AMX ½° AMt ¤t)Èä. 4 Ù ÝD äX$t c d| à X ì üíÜ$. ü èÄ<\ iÈä. 5 É ÝD äX$t } 1 Ä c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. 8\ à ÁÜ| ô¥` D Ä\ © %\ )¡ | >D LLÀ Ð ü| ÉiÈä. # É ÝD èX$t c d| àX ì üíÜ$. # c d| Ä tt )¡ x )¡mD tø µÈä. ¼D <t \ É Ýt Ü)Èä. à ¬© ) 0¥ Tt äLü @ 0¥äD À à µÈä: BSM (\à )¡m 0µ)chLIST (D © ])LOC (Àí )¡m É Ý) 8à 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. 88 Ko ¥ 04 )¡ ü ¥ ÝX0 ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16D tt )¡mD 6 LÀ } 0µÜ¬ à, Ð tù ¼D ì )¡mD Ý` µÈä. 2 0µ ¥XÐ ¥` ü| ><t tù ¬ $ 8 \p¬À Jà H LLÀ ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16D ì üí Ü$. ¬© Ý\ 8 ¬ $ 8 \Ü Ð x\ äL Ä ÁÜ\ À)Èä. Ý\ |$ )¡m ü T¨¬Ð ¥ )Èä. Ð ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16D tt ¥´ )¡mD Ý` µÈä. 8à ! 3 FM 4Üä 6 )<\ iÄ 18 X FM )¡mü 6 X AM )¡mD T¨¬ Ð ¥` µÈä. ! a@ b| ¬©Xì ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16Ð `ù )¡m ü| Ý` Ä µÈä. \ à8Ð \ ü Ý Àí )¡m É Ý 0¥D µt ©\ | ¡X |$ )¡mÌD Ý` µÈä. \ 1 16D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 16t ¤tÐ À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. FM: Local OFFLevel 1Level 2Level 3 Level 4 AM: Local OFFLevel 1Level 2 Level 4 $D µt ä° \ à8| ¡X )¡mÌ àXÄ] ` ÀÌ ®@ $ D ©t (<\ }\ à8| ¡ X )¡mD à` Ä µÈä. ¥ \ | ¡X )¡ m ü ¥X0 BSM (\à )¡m 0µ) 0¥D µt ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16Ð ¥ \ ü 6 | Ù<\ ¥` µÈä. |è ¥ t tù ¼D ì tù ü| Ý` µÈä. 1 BSM ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü 2 BSMD ©X$t BSMD ì üíÜ$. Searchingt À©Èä. ¥ %\ 6 ) ¡m ü \ à8 \ ¬ Ý ¼ 16Ð ¥)Èä. Åt Ìt Searchingt ¬|Àà ¤ t ¬ $ D ©] ¨Ü\ X) Èä. # ¥ ÅD èX$t BSM| äÜ ì ü íÜ$. 8à BSMD ¬©Xì )¡m ü| ¥Xt 16Ð ¥´ X )¡m ü ÀÌÈ Ä µÈä. 1 Àí ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð LOC| ì üíÜ$. 2 Àí )¡m É Ä| $X$t LOC| ì üíÜ$. LOC| õt tt äL $t \ X)Èä: Ko 89 ¥ 04 ¬ $ D ©]Ð )¡m ÝX0 ¬ $ D ©]@ ¬ $ )¡m ©] D ôì üp t X| Ýt à` Ä] iÈä. 1 ¬ $ D ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ chLIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX )¡m ü| ÝX$t 16 ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. 8à ÐX )¡mD ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬ ©` Ä µÈä. 90 Ko ¥ 05 ´¥ CD t´ CD ¬ÝX0 CD \) ¬o 1 2 # CD EJECT| ì CD| ¼¼ µÈä. FORM1 äL@ ´¥ CD t´\ CD| ¬ÝX0 t D\ 0øx èÄä Èä. ¤ t ÀÐ CD Ù )D ôä 8X $ i Èä. ½à CD| ¼¸ Ä t (D ô´ T D\ ¬©X À ÈíÜ$. t (D ô´ Pt ¬à Ý D L ÁD D µÈä. 1 ¬Ý Ü \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸X ¬Ý ½ü Üt \ Ü)Èä. 2 ¸ 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t \Ü)Èä. 1 CD EJECT| ì üíÜ$. CD \) ¬ot À©Èä. # CD ½ Ä ´¥ CD t´| $t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. \ 3 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. 4 h¬ 0 0| äX$t c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. # Rough searchÐ \ É )D Ýä t c d| x Ä x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¬ ¤l ´X 10 ¸D É` µÈ ä. (93 tÀX É ) ÝX0| 8pt üíÜ$.) 5 ^<\ tð0 ¤\ tð0| ä X$t c d| ì üíÜ$. d| tt äL ¸X Ü <\ t Èä. c| \ tt ¬ ¸X Ü <\ tÈä. äÜ tt t ¸ <\ tÈä. 8à ÝX 2 CD| CD \) ¬oÐ #µÈä. t (t Ù<\ ëà ¬Ýt Ü )Èä. ! ´¥ CD t´ \ Ð X) \ 12 cm 8 cm (ñ ) CD| ¬ÝiÈä. 8 cm CD| ¬Ý` L ´0| ¬©XÀ ÈíÜ $. ! CD xÐ ´ \ <´Ä CD \) ¬oÐ ½ XÀ ÈíÜ$. ! CD <\ ½ ´ <t Á à¥t Ý` µÈä. ! ¤l| D ½ ` Æp ¤l| ½ \ Ä ¤l ¬ÝÀ J<t ¤l X |¨tt \ ¥Xà À UxiÈä. ¤l| ¼´$t CD EJECT| tà ¤ l| äÜ ½ X0 Ð ¤lX Á ì | UxiÈä. Ko 91 ¥ 05 ´¥ CD t´ ! ´¥ CD t´ \ ÙXÀ JD ½ ° ERROR-11 ñü @ Ðì TÜÀ À µÈä. 139 tÀX ´¥ CD t´ Ðì TÜÀ| 8pt üíÜ$. ! CD TEXT ¤l| ½ Xt ¤l/¸ ©t Ù<\ |½<\ ¤ld )È ä. 2 õ ¬ÝD ÙX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t ] LÀ ¬Ý Ä õ)Èä. # õ ¬ÝD èX$t RPT| äÜ ì ü íÜ$. 8à à ´¥ CD t´ Ù ) ´¥ CD t´ 0¥ Tt äL 0¥D Àà µÈä: RPT (õ ¬Ý)RDM (4 ¬Ý) SCAN (¤ ¬Ý)T.LIST (¸ © © ])PAUSE (|Ü À)TTLin (¤l © %)R.SRCH (É ))T.READ (Ü ø ¤t) ! ¸ Ét h¬ 0 0| Ý Xt õ ¬Ýt Ù<\ è)Èä. ! õ ¬Ýt 8 D L õ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ T.RPT À©È ä. 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 4 ¬Ý 0¥D µt 4 \ CDX ¸D ¬ÝiÈä. 1 4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ RDMD ì üíÜ$. 8à ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. (¤l © % ¨Ü| ÝD L (TTLin), ¤t Ù<\ t<\ ÌD À JµÈä.) ! T.LIST CD TEXT ¤l| ¬ÝD LÌ ¤t)Èä. 2 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸t 4 \ ¬ Ý)Èä. # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à 4 ¬Ýt 8 D L 4 ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ RDMt À©Èä. ¬Ý õX0 õ ¬Ý 0¥D µt Ù|\ ¸D ìì è` µÈä. 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü CDX ¸ ¤X0 ¤ ¬Ý@ CDÐ ¨à ¸Ð LX 10 ÉÌ ¬ÝiÈä. 1 ¤ ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð SCAND ì üíÜ$. 92 Ko ¥ 05 ´¥ CD t´ 2 ¤ ¬ÝD ÙX$t SCAND ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸X L 10 ¬ Ý)Èä. 3 ÐX ¸| >@ Ä, ¤ ¬ÝD è X$t SCAND ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. ¸t Ä ¬Ý)Èä. CD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 |Ü À 0¥<\ CDX ¬ÝD |Ü<\ Àܬ µÈä. 8à ! CDX ¤t ]t ¸t äÜ Á<\ ¬Ý)Èä. ! ¤ ¬Ýt 8 D L ¤ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ SCANt À©È ä. ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ ! ÐX ¸ ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ! CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` LÐÌ t ¨Ü\ X` µÈä. \ # ¤ ¨Ü Ù<\ èt ¤ ¨Ü | äÜ Ýt üíÜ$. 8à Ý ¸ © ©]@ CD TEXT ¤l ÁÐ ¸ © ©]D ôì üp t X| Ý t ¬Ý` Ä] iÈä. 1 ¸ © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ T.LIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX ¸ ©D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÐX ¸ ©t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 1 |Ü À ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ PAUSE| ì üíÜ$. 2 |Ü À| ÙX$t PAUSE| ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¸X ¬Ýt |Ü À)Èä. # |Ü À| èX$t PAUSE| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à äL ¤tÐ PAUSE| ì |Ü À | Ù è` Ä µÈä. É ) ÝX0 h¬ 0/0 ¬tÐ É ¨Ü| X Xà ä 10Èä ÉD ` µÈä. 1 É ) ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX ¸ ©D ÝX0 t tù + ¼D ì üíÜ$. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 2 É )D ÝX$t R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. ÐX É )t ¤tÐ À L LÀ R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. Ko 93 ¥ 05 ´¥ CD t´ ! FF/REV h¬ 0 0 ! Rough search ä 10 ¸Èä ÉX 0 CD t´X 111 tÀX ¤l © %X0| 8pXíÜ$. 8à ¬ ¤lÐ ä 10X ¸ Èä ÉX0 ¤lÐ 10 tÁX ¸t ìh´ < t ä 10X ¸Èä ÉD ` µ Èä. ¤lÐ ¸t Ît ìh´ ät ¬ÝD X$ ¸D µ<\ É` µÈä. 1 É ) Rough search| Ýt üíÜ $. ^ tÀX É ) ÝX0| 8pt ü íÜ$. 2 ¤l ´ ä 10X ¸Èä ÉX0 t c d| x ÁÜ\ Àt üíÜ $. # ¤lÐ 10 øÌX ¸t ìh´ ä t d| tà x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¤lX ÈÀÉ ¸t Ý)Èä. \ ä 10 ¸D ÉXà Ä ¸X ¨D 8 10 øÌ | ½° d| tà x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¤ lX ÈÀÉ ¸t Ý)Èä. # ¤lÐ 10 øÌX ¸t ìh´ ä t c| tà x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¤lX «ø ¸t Ý)Èä. \ ä 10 ¸D ÉXà Ä ¸X ¨D 8 10 øÌ | ½° c| tà x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¤ lX «ø ¸t Ý)Èä. ! CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° t ¨Ü\ X\ät Cant inputt ¤t p ©D %` ƵÈä. ! t 00Ð tù ¤l p ÄÐÄ ©@ T¨¬Ð 0µ0 L8Ð tÄÐ tù ¤l| 00Ð ½ Xt ©t äÜ \Ü )Èä. ! 48 ¥X ¤lÐ \ pt0 T¨¬Ð ¨ P % Ä äÜ È\´ ¤l pt0 %t ¥ $ ¤l pt0 Ð ¹Ð 0])Èä. ! @ð CD t´| ð°Xt ¤l 100 ¥ LÀ ¤l ©D %` µÈä. ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° D𤸠t ü ¸ ©ü @ M¤¸ ¤t| X` µÈä. M¤¸ 32X 8ô ä 8t M¤¸X 8À D ü Ä] M¤¸| |½<\ ¤ld` µÈä. 1 © ¨Ü| íÜ$. 2 ÐX ©D ¤t X0 t t ù ¼D ì üíÜ$. FORM1 FORM3 ¼ ¤l © %X0 ¤l © % 0¥D ¬©Xt CD ©D 108LÀ ø¬à ¤l ©D 48LÀ t 00Ð %` µÈä. CD ©D %Xt % ©t ¤ t)Èä. ÙÐ \ 8\ ´©@ @ð 94 Ko ÝX$t TITLED ì ü Ù D.TTL ¤l ©D ¤tiÈä. D.ART ¤l D𤸠tD ¤tiÈ ä. T.TTL ¸ ©D ¤tiÈä. T.ART ¸ D𤸠tD ¤tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. ¥ 05 ´¥ CD t´ FORM2 Ù TTL1 ¤l ©ü ¸ ©D ¤ti Èä. TTL2 ¤l ©ü ¤l D𤸠tD ¤tiÈä. TTL3 ¸ ©ü ¸ D𤸠tD ¤ tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. \ ¼ 8à ! 8 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. ! © ¨ÜÐ ¸D ÝX0 t c d| ¬©` ƵÈä. ! FORM2 ¤t| Ý\ ½° ©@ 248LÀ ¤t)Èä. ! CD TEXT ¤l ¤l ©, D𤸠t ¸ ©ü @ M¤¸ ô| T )\ CD 0¥ Èä. ! CD TEXT ¤lÐ ¹ ô %´ À J<t No xxxx \Ü)Èä (, No artist name). ! ¬ ¬Ý x ¤lX ©t %´ À J<t No titlet \Ü)Èä. Ko 95 ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ MP3/WMA ¬ÝX0 1 2 3 4 5 FORM1 äL@ ´¥ CD t´\ MP3/WMA | ¬ÝX0 t D\ 0øx èÄä È ä. ¤ tÀÐ à MP3/WMA Ù ) D ôä 8X $ iÈä. ½à CD-ROMD ¼¸ Ä t (D ô´ T D\ ¬ ©XÀ ÈíÜ$. t (D ô´ Pt ¬à ÝD L ÁD D µÈä. 1 MP3/WMA \Ü MP3/WMA |t ¬Ýà D L \Ü )Èä. 2 ôT + \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ôT 8 \Ü)Èä. 3 ¸ 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸(|)t \Ü)Èä. 4 D¸ t¸ \Ü 5 ¬Ý Ü \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸(|)X ¬Ý ½ü Ü t \Ü)Èä. 1 CD EJECT| ì üíÜ$. CD \) ¬ot À©Èä. # CD-ROMt ½ Ä ´¥ CD t´| ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 96 Ko 2 CD| CD-ROMÐ #µÈä. t (t Ù<\ ëà ¬Ýt Ü )Èä. CD \) ¬o # CD EJECT| ì CD-ROMD ¼¼ µÈ ä. 3 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. 4 ôT| Ü$. ÝX$t a b| ì üí # T) MP3/WMA |t ìhÀ J@ ôT| Ý` ƵÈä. # ôT 01(ROOT)<\ ÌD 0 t BAND| tà x D\ ÀXíÜ$. øì ôT 01(ROOT)Ð |t ìh´ À J ät ôT 02Ð0 ¬Ýt Ü)Èä. 5 h¬ 0 0| äX$t c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. # t@ ¬Ýà |Ð tÌ h¬ 0@ 0 ä)Èä. t äL |Ð ÄìXt t Ù@ è)Èä. # Rough searchÐ \ É )D Ýä t c d| x Ä x ÁÜ| ÀXt ¬ ôT ´X 10 ¸D É` µÈ ä. (99 tÀX É ) ÝX0| 8pt üíÜ$.) 6 ^<\ tð0 ¤\ tð0| ä X$t c d| ì üíÜ$. d| tt äL ¸X Ü <\ t Èä. c| \ tt ¬ ¸X Ü <\ tÈä. äÜ tt t ¸ <\ tÈä. ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ 8à \ ! MP3/WMA |ü CD-EXTRA MIXED-MODE CD@ @ $$ pt0 (CD-DA) © ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° P À ¨P ä MP3/WMA@ BAND © CD-DA ¬t| Xh<\hÌ ¬Ý` µÈä. ! MP3/WMA |ü $$ pt0(CD-DA) ¬Ý ¬t| Xät ¬Ý@ ¤lX « ø ¸0 Ü)Èä. ! ´¥ CD t´ CD-ROMÐ T) MP3/WMA |D ¬Ý` µÈä. (¬ Ý ¥\ |Ð t 141 tÀ| 8 pt üíÜ$.) ! CD xÐ ´ \ <´Ä CD \) ¬oÐ ½ XÀ ÈíÜ$. ! CD <\ ½ ´ <t Á à¥t Ý` µÈä. ! T ¬Ý Üü % ¬´Ü ¬tÐ }X Àð Át µÈä. t@ ¹ @ð 8Xü ìì ôTäD ¬Ý` L tù) Èä. }0 ÅD Xà D ½°Ð Format read ¤t)Èä. ! ¤l| D ½ ` Æp ¤l| ½ \ Ä ¤l ¬ÝÀ J<t ¤l X |¨tt \ ¥Xà À UxiÈä. ¤l| ¼´$t CD EJECT| tà ¤ l| äÜ ½ X0 Ð ¤lX Á ì | UxiÈä. ! | 8 \ ¬Ýt )Èä. ôT ´Ð |t ÆD ½° tù ôT| tÈ ä. (øì ôT 01(ROOT)Ð |t ìh ´ À Jät ôT 02Ð0 ¬Ýt Ü )Èä.) ! VBR( À D¸ t¸)\ T) | D ¬Ý` ½° h¬ 0 0 Ùt ¬©Èät ¬Ý Ü@ ,t ¤ tÀ JD Èä. ! ½ ¤lÐ ¬Ý` |t ìh ´ À Jät No Audio ¤t) Èä. ! h¬ 0 0 ÜÐ ¬´Ü $ À JµÈä. ! ´¥ CD t´ \ ÙXÀ JD ½ ° ERROR-11 ñü @ Ðì TÜÀ À µÈä. 139 tÀX ´¥ CD t´ Ðì TÜÀ| 8pt üíÜ$. ! MP3/WMA ¤l ½ ½° ôT t ü | tt Ù<\ |½<\ ¤ld 0 ÜiÈä. à ´¥ CD t´(MP3/ WMA) Ù ) MP3/WMA 0¥ Tt äLü @ 0¥ä D Àà µÈä: RPT (õ ¬Ý)RDM (4 ¬Ý) SCAN (¤ ¬Ý)F.LIST (ôT © © ])PAUSE (|Ü À)TTLin (¤l © %)R.SRCH (É ))T.READ (Ü ø ¤t) 8à ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. (¤l © % ¨Ü| ÝD L (TTLin), ¤t Ù<\ t<\ ÌD À JµÈä.) ! CD -ROM ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° ¤l © % ¨Ü(TTLin)\ X\ät Cant inputt ¤t p ©D % ` ƵÈä. ¬Ý õX0 MP3/WMA ¬ÝÐ t 8 À õ ¬Ý õ)Èä: Folder repeat (ôT õ), Track repeat (\ ¸ õ) and Disc repeat (¨à ¸ õ). Ko 97 ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü 2 õ | ÝX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. ÐX õ ¤tÐ À L LÀ RPT| ì üíÜ$. ! Folder repeat ¬ ôT õ ! Track repeat À ¬ ¸Ì õ ! Disc repeat ¨à ¸ õ 8à ! õ ¬Ý Ð äx ôT| ÝXt õ ¬ Ý Disc repeat\ À½)Èä. ! Track repeat Ð ¸ É h¬ 0/ 0| äXt õ Folder repeat\ À½)Èä. ! Folder repeat ÝÈD ½° tùX X ôT| ¬Ý` ƵÈä. ! õ ¨Ü Ì ½° 0ø ¤tÐ T.RPT(\ ¸ õ) FOLDER PRT(ôT õ) À Ä µÈä. 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 4 ¬ÝD µt ¸D Folder repeat@ Disc repeat P À õ ´Ð 4 \ ¬Ý` µÈä. 1 õ | ÝiÈä. ^ tÀX ¬Ý õX0| 8pt üíÜ $. 2 4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ RDMD ì üíÜ$. 3 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸@ ^Ð Ý\ Folder repeat Disc repeat ´Ð 4 \ ¬Ý)Èä. 98 Ko # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à 4 ¬Ýt 8 D L 4 ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ RDMt À©Èä. ôT@ ¸ ¤ Folder repeat| ¬©X Ð Ý\ ôT X ¸X Ü t } 10 ÙH ¬Ý) Èä. Disc repeat| ¬©X Ð ôTX «ø ¸X Ü t } 10 ÙH ¬Ý )Èä. 1 õ | ÝiÈä. ^ tÀX ¬Ý õX0| 8pt üíÜ $. 2 ¤ ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð SCAND ì üíÜ$. 3 ¤ ¬ÝD ÙX$t SCAND ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ôT ´ ¸X L 10 ( ôTX «ø ¸) É t ¬Ý)Èä. 4 ÐX ¸( ôT)D >XD L ¤ D èX$t SCAND ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. ¸( ôT)t Ä ¬Ý)Èä. # ¤ ¨Ü Ù<\ èt ¤ ¨Ü | äÜ Ýt üíÜ$. 8à ! ¸ ôTX ¤t ]t ¸t Á <\ äÜ ¬Ý)Èä. ! ¤ ¬Ýt 8 D L ¤ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ SCANt À©È ä. ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ MP3/WMA ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 |Ü À 0¥<\ MP3/WMAX ¬ÝD | Ü<\ Àܬ µÈä. 1 |Ü À ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ PAUSE| ì üíÜ$. # |Ü À| èX$t PAUSE| äÜ ì üíÜ$. \ 2 |Ü À| ÙX$t PAUSE| ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¸X ¬Ýt |Ü À)Èä. t \Ü Ý ôTHX | | ÀÅÈä. Ý ôT HÐ |t Æ<t D4Ä ¤t À JµÈä. 3 ÐX ôT ©D ÝX0 t tù + ¼D ì üíÜ$. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 8à 8à äL ¤tÐ PAUSE| ì |Ü À | Ù è` Ä µÈä. ÐX ôT ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. É ) ôT © ©]Ð ôT ÝX0 ôT © ©]@ ôT © ©]D ôì üp t X| Ýt ¬Ý` Ä] iÈ ä. 1 ôT © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ F.LIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX ôT ©D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÐX ôT ©t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÝX0 h¬ 0/0 ¬tÐ É ¨Ü| X Xà ä 10Èä ÉD ` µÈä. 1 É ) ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. 2 É )D ÝX$t R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. ÐX É )t ¤tÐ À L LÀ R.SRCH| ì üíÜ$. ! FF/REV h¬ 0 0 ! Rough search ä 10 ¸Èä ÉX 0 Ko 99 ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ ¬ ôTÐ ä 10X ¸È ä ÉX0 ¬ ôTÐ 10 tÁX ¸t ìh´ <t ä 10X ¸Èä ÉD ` µÈä. ôTÐ ¸t Ît ìh´ ät ¬ÝD X$ ¸D µ<\ É` µÈä. 1 É ) Rough search| Ýt üíÜ $. ^ tÀX É ) ÝX0| 8pt ü íÜ$. 2 ¬ ôT ´ ä 10X ¸Èä ÉX 0 t c d| x ÁÜ\ Àt üí Ü$. # ¬ ôTÐ 10 øÌX ¸t ìh´ ät d| tà x ÁÜ| Àt ôTX ÈÀÉ ¸D ÝXíÜ$. \ ä 10X ¸ D É\ ÄÐ ¨D ¸X 10 øÌt|t d| tà x ÁÜ| Àt t ù ôTX ÈÀÉ ¸D Ýt üíÜ$. # ¬ ôTÐ 10 øÌX ¸t ìh´ ät c| tà x ÁÜ| Àt ôTX «ø ¸D ÝXíÜ$. \ ä 10X ¸ D É\ ÄÐ ¨D ¸X 10 øÌt|t c| tà x ÁÜ| Àt t ù ôTX «ø ¸D Ýt üíÜ$. Üø ¤t XX0 MP3/WMA ¤lÐ ¸ ©ü D𤸠tü @ M¤¸ ô| ìhXà ät Üø ¤t| ÙXp è` µÈä. ! Üø ¤t| Hät t 0¥t 8 D L ôä ¬Ý` Üt çD ÑÈä. 1 Üø ¤t ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ T.READ| ì üíÜ$. 100 Ko 2 Üø ¤t| $t T.READ| ì üíÜ$. # Üø ¤t| D$t T.READ| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à Üø ¤t| $ ½° t 00 M¤¸ ô| }0 t ¬ ¸X Ü <\ ÌD Èä. ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 D𤸠tt ¸ ©ü @ M¤¸ ¤t| X` µÈä. M¤¸ 32X 8ôä 8t M¤¸X 8À D ü Ä] M¤¸| |½<\ ¤ld` µÈä. 1 © ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t TITLED ì ü 2 ÐX ©D ¤t X0 t t ù ¼D ì üíÜ$. FORM1 FORM3 ¼ Ù FOLDER ôT tD ¤tiÈä. FILE | tD ¤tiÈä. ALBUM h ©D ¤tiÈä. T.TTL ¸ ©D ¤tiÈä. ARTIST ¸ D𤸠tD ¤tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. FORM2 ¼ Ù F+FIL ôT tü | tD ¤tiÈ ä. FIL+T | tü ¸ ©D ¤tiÈ ä. ¥ 06 MP3/WMA t´ ¼ Ù ALB+T h ©ü ¸ ©D ¤tiÈ ä. TR+ART ¸ ©ü ¸ D𤸠tD ¤ tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. \ 8à ! 8 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. ! © ¨ÜÐ ôT ¸D ÝX0 t a/b/c/d| ¬©` ƵÈä. ! FORM2 ¤t| Ý\ ½° ©@ 248LÀ ¤t)Èä. ! MP3/WMA ¤lÐ ¹ ô %´ À J<t No xxxx \Ü)Èä (, No album tilte). ! WMA |D xT) X0 t ¬© ¹ Q©\ø¨Ð t h tü äx M ¤¸ ô ,t ¤t À JD Ä µÈä. Ko 101 ¥ 07 ´¥ MD t´ MD ¬ÝX0 1 2 MD| MD \) ¬oÐ #µÈä. t (t Ù<\ ëà ¬Ýt Ü )Èä. 3 4 2 MD \) ¬o # MD EJECT| ì MD| ¼¼ µÈä. 5 FORM1 äL@ ´¥ MD t´\ MD ¬ÝX0 t D\ 0øx èÄä Èä. ¤ tÀ Ð à MD Ù )D ôä 8X $ iÈä. MD| ¼¸ Ä t (D ô´ T D\ ¬©X À ÈíÜ$. t (D ô´ Pt ¬à Ý D L ÁD D µÈä. 1 MDLP \Ü (×2 ×4) ¥Ü T) 0¥t © MD L \Ü)Èä. ¬Ý 2 øù 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x øùt \Ü)Èä. ¬Ý L À©È 5 ¬Ý Ü \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸X ¬Ý ½ü Üt \ Ü)Èä. 1 MD EJECT| ì üíÜ$. MD \) ¬ot À©Èä. # MD| ½ \ Ä ´¥ MD t´| $t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. Ko 6 ^<\ tð0 ¤\ tð0| ä X$t c d| ì üíÜ$. d| tt äL ¸X Ü <\ t Èä. c| \ tt ¬ ¸X Ü <\ tÈä. äÜ tt t ¸ <\ tÈä. 8à 3 ¸ 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t \Ü)Èä. 102 4 øù T) MD| ¬Ý` L a b| ì øùD Ý` µÈä. 5 h¬ 0 0| äX$t c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. ½à 4 GRP \Ü øù T) MD ä. 3 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. ÝX ! MD xÐ ´ \ <´Ä MD \) ¬oÐ ½ XÀ ÈíÜ$. ! MD <\ ½ ´ <t Á à¥t Ý` µÈä. ! MD T0(143 tÀX MD t´@ ¬ | 8pt üíÜ$) ë D UxXà MD| ½ XíÜ$. ! ¤l| ½ D ½° t 00 ¸ @ @ ¤l ÁÐ T) ô| }µÈ ä. ¤l| } ÙH ¤tÐ TOC read \Ü)Èä. ! ´¥ MD t´ \ ÙXÀ JD ½° ERROR-11 ñü @ Ðì TÜÀ À µÈä. 139 tÀX ´¥ MD t´ Ðì TÜÀ| 8pt üíÜ$. ¥ 07 ´¥ MD t´ ! ¥Ü T) 0¥t © MD| ¬Ý` ½° ×2 ×4 \Ü ¤t)Èä. ! MD| ½ Xt ¤l( øù) Ù <\ |½<\ ¤ld )Èä. à ´¥ MD t´ Ù ) 8à ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. ! G.LIST øù T) MD| ¬ÝD LÌ ¤t)Èä. ¬Ý õX0 øù T)À J@ MD õ ¬Ý 0¥D µt Ù|\ ¸D ìì è` µÈä. 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü 2 õ ¬ÝD ÙX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t ] LÀ ¬Ý Ä õ)Èä. # õ ¬ÝD èX$t RPT| äÜ ì ü íÜ$. 8à ! ¸ Ét h¬ 0 0| Ý Xt õ ¬Ýt Ù<\ è)Èä. øù T) MD øù T) MD ¬ÝÐ t 8 À õ ¬Ý õ)Èä: Group repeat (ø ù õ), Track repeat (\ ¸ õ) Disc repeat (¨à ¸ õ). 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü \ ´¥ MD t´ 0¥ Tt äL 0¥D Àà µÈä: RPT (õ ¬Ý)RDM (4 ¬Ý) SCAN (¤ ¬Ý)T.LIST (¸ © © ])G.LIST (øù © ©])PAUSE (|Ü À) ! õ ¬Ýt 8 D L õ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ T.RPT À©Èä. 2 õ | ÝX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. ÐX õ ¤tÐ À L LÀ RPT| ì üíÜ$. ! Group repeat ¬ øù õ ¬Ý ! Track repeat À ¬ ¸Ì õ ! Disc repeat ¨à ¸ õ 8à ! õ ¬Ý Ð äx øùD ÝXt õ ¬ Ý Disc repeat\ À½)Èä. ! Track repeat Ð ¸ É h¬ 0/ 0| äXt õ Group repeat\ À½)Èä. ! õ ¨Ü Ì ½° 0ø ¤tÐ T.RPT (\ ¸ õ) GRP RPT (øù õ) À Ä µÈä. 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 4 ¬Ý 0¥D µt 4 \ MD X ¸D ¬ÝiÈä. ! øù T) MD| ¬Ý` L 4 ¬ Ý@ õ , Group repeat Disc repeat ¬tÐ 4 \ ¸ D ¬Ý` Ä] t Èä. 1 4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ RDMD ì üíÜ$. Ko 103 ¥ 07 ´¥ MD t´ 2 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸t 4 \ ¬ Ý)Èä. # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à 4 ¬Ýt 8 D L 4 ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ RDMt À©Èä. MDX ¸ ¤X0 ¤ ¬Ý@ MDÐ ¨à ¸Ð L X 10 ÉÌ ¬ÝiÈä. ! øù T) MD| ¬Ý` L Group repeat| ¬©X ÙHÐ Ý\ øùX ¸X Ü t } 10 Ù H ¬Ý)Èä. Disc repeat| ¬©X Ð øùX «ø ¸X Ü t } 10 ÙH ¬Ý)Èä. 1 ¤ ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð SCAND ì üíÜ$. 2 ¤ ¬ÝD ÙX$t SCAND ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸X L 10 ¬ Ý)Èä. ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ Ý ¸ © ©]@ MD ÁÐ ¸ © ©] D ôì üp t X| Ýt ¬Ý` Ä] iÈä. 1 ¸ © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ T.LIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX ¸ ©D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÐX ¸ ©t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX ¸ ©D ÝX0 t tù + ¼D ì üíÜ$. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 8à # øù T) MD| ¬Ý` L ¬ øù( øùX « ø ¸)X ¸Ð ^ t 10 ÙH ¬Ý)Èä. ÐX ¸ ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. 3 ÐX ¸( øù)D >XD L ¤ D èX$t SCAND ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. ¸( øù)t Ä ¬Ý)Èä. øù © ©]Ð ¤l X0 # ¤ ¨Ü Ù<\ èt ¤ ¨Ü | äÜ Ýt üíÜ$. 8à ! MDX ¤t ]t ¸t äÜ Á<\ ¬Ý)Èä. 104 ! ¤ ¬Ýt 8 D L ¤ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ SCANt À©È ä. Ko Ý øù © ©]@ øù´X © ©]D ôì üp t X| Ýt ¬Ý` µÈ ä. 1 øù © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ G.LIST| ì üíÜ$. ¥ 07 ´¥ MD t´ 2 ÐX øù ©D ¤tX0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÐX øù ©t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 MD| ¬Ý` ½° ¤l ©ü ¸ © ü @ M¤¸ ¤t| X` µ Èä. M¤¸ 32X 8ôä 8t M¤¸ X 8À D ü Ä] M¤¸| |½ <\ ¤ld` µÈä. t \Ü Ý øù HX ¸ | ÀÅÈä. 3 ÐX øù ©D ÝX0 t tù + ¼D ì üíÜ$. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 8à ÐX øù ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. MD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 |Ü À 0¥<\ MDX ¬ÝD |Ü<\ Àܬ µÈä. 1 |Ü À ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ PAUSE| ì üíÜ$. 2 |Ü À| ÙX$t PAUSE| ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¸X ¬Ýt |Ü À)Èä. # |Ü À| èX$t PAUSE| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à äL ¤tÐ PAUSE| ì |Ü À | Ù è` Ä µÈä. ÝX$t TITLED ì ü \ 1 © ¨Ü| íÜ$. 2 ÐX ©D ¤t X0 t t ù ¼D ì üíÜ$. FORM1 FORM3 ¼ Ù D.TTL ¤l ©D ¤tiÈä. G.TTL øù ©D ¤tiÈä. T.TTL ¸ ©D ¤tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. FORM2 ¼ Ù TTL1 øù ©ü ¸ ©D ¤tiÈ ä. TTL2 ¤l ©ü ¸ ©D ¤ti Èä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. 8à ! 8 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. ! © ¨ÜÐ øù ¸D ÝX0 t a/b/c/d| ¬©` ƵÈä. ! FORM2 ¤t| Ý\ ½° ©@ 248LÀ ¤t)Èä. ! ¬ ¬Ý x ¤lX ©t %´ À J<t No titlet \Ü)Èä. ! G.TTL, TTL1 TTL2@ øù T) MD| ¬ÝD LÌ ¤t)Èä. Ko 105 ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ CD ¬ÝX0 4 h¬ 0 0| äX$t c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. 1 2 8à 3 FORM1 t 00| ¬©Xì Ää @ð CD t ´| ´` µÈä. @ð CD t´\ CD| ¬ÝX p D \ 0ø Èä. ¤ tÀÐ CD Ù )D ôä 8X $ iÈä. 1 ¤l 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¤l 5 ^<\ tð0 ¤\ tð0| ä X$t c d| ì üíÜ$. d| tt äL ¸X Ü <\ t Èä. c| \ tt ¬ ¸X Ü <\ tÈä. äÜ tt t ¸ <\ tÈä. \Ü)Èä. ! @ð CD t´ D Ù ÁÜ|t Ready \Ü)Èä. ! @ð CD t´ \ ÙXÀ J<t ERROR-11 ñX Ðì TÜÀ À µÈä. @ð CD t´ ¬© $ | 8 pt üíÜ$. ! @ð CD t´X © ¥XÐ ¤l Æ <t No disc \Ü)Èä. ! CD TEXT 8X @ð CD t´Ð CD TEXT ¤l| ÝXt ¤l@ ¸ ©t |½<\ Ù ¤ld )Èä. 2 ¸ 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t \Ü)Èä. 3 ¬Ý Ü \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x ¸X ¬Ý ½ü Üt \ Ü)Èä. 1 @ð CD t´| ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. Multi-CD ¤t LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. 3 ¤l| ÝX$t a b| ì ü íÜ$. ¤l Æ ¤l 8 tð )È ä. # ¤l| Á ÝX0 t 16 ( 712)¼D ¬©` Ä µÈä. 106 Ko ¤l 50 ¥ ©ÉX @ð CD t´ ø $ Ð $ 0¥ä@ ¤l 50 ¥ © ÉX @ð CD t´Ð t ÀÐ)È ä. ¤l Á ÝX0 ¤l| Á ÝX0 t 16 ( 712)¼D ¬©` Ä µÈä. 1 16 ( 712)D ¤t X$t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 16 ( 712)t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ 2 1Ð 6( 7Ð 12)LÀ X\ ¤ l| ÝX0 t 16 ( 712) ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. 8à 6 ¤l ä CD t´ ð°ÈD ½° 712| ¤t` ƵÈä. @ð CD t´ 0¥ Tt äL 0¥D Àà µÈä: RPT (õ ¬Ý)RDM (4 ¬Ý) SCAN (¤ ¬Ý)T.LIST (¸ © © ])D.LIST (¤l © ©])PAUSE (| Ü À)TTLin (¤l © %)COMP (U DBE)ITS.P (ITS ¬Ý)ITS.M (ITS \ø) 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü 2 õ | ÝX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. ÐX õ ¤tÐ À L LÀ RPT| ì üíÜ$. \ à @ð CD t´ Ù ) CD t´ õ), Track repeat (\ ¸ õ) ü Disc repeat (¤l õ). ! Magazine repeat @ð CD t´Ð ¨à ¤l õ ¬Ý ! Track repeat À ¬ ¸Ì õ ! Disc repeat ¬ ¤l õ 8à ! õ ¬Ý Ð äx ¤l| ÝXt õ Magazine repeat\ À½)Èä. ! Track repeat Ð ¸ É h¬ 0/ 0| äXt õ Disc repeat\ À½)Èä. ! õ ¨Ü Ì ½° 0ø ¤tÐ T.RPT(\ ¸ õ) D.RPT(¤l õ) À Ä µÈä. 8à ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. (¤l © % ¨Ü(TTLin) ITS \ø ¨Ü(ITS.M)| ÝD L, ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌD À JµÈ ä.) ! CD TEXT 8X @ð CD t´Ð CD TEXT ¤l| ¬ÝX ½°ÐÌ T.LIST \Ü)Èä. ¬Ý õX0 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 4 ¬ÝD µt ¸D Magazine repeat@ Disc repeat P À õ ´Ð 4 \ ¬Ý` µÈ ä. 1 õ | ÝiÈä. t tÀX ¬Ý õX0| 8pt üíÜ $. 2 4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ RDMD ì üíÜ$. @ð CD t´X ½° 8 À õ ¬Ý ÀÐ)Èä. Magazine repeat (@ð Ko 107 ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ 3 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸@ ^Ð Ý\ Magazine repeat Disc repeat ´Ð 4 \ ¬Ý)Èä. # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à ! ¸ ¤lX ¤t ]t ¸t Á<\ äÜ ¬Ý)Èä. ! ¤ ¬Ýt 8 D L ¤ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ SCANt À©È ä. 8à 4 ¬Ýt 8 D L 4 ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ RDMt À©Èä. CD@ ¸ ¤ Disc repeat| ¬©X Ð Ý\ ¤l X ¸X Ü t } 10 ÙH ¬Ý) Èä. Magazine repeat| ¬©X Ð ¤lX «ø ¸X Ü t } 10 Ù H ¬Ý)Èä. 1 õ | ÝiÈä. ^ tÀX ¬Ý õX0| 8pt üíÜ $. ¸ © ©]Ð ¸ Ý ¸ © ©]@ CD TEXT ¤l ÁÐ ¸ © ©]D ôì üp t X| Ý t ¬Ý` Ä] iÈä. 1 ¸ © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ T.LIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX ¸ ©D ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ÐX ¸ ©t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 ¤ ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð SCAND ì üíÜ$. 3 ¤ ¬ÝD ÙX$t SCAND ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¤lX ¸X L 10 ( ¤lX «ø ¸) É t ¬Ý)Èä. 3 ÐX ¸ ©D ÝX0 t tù + ¼D ì üíÜ$. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 4 ÐX ¸ ( ¤l)D >XD L ¤D èX$t SCAND ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. ¸ ( ¤l)t Ä ¬Ý)Èä. ! ÐX ¸ ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ! CD TEXT 8X @ð CD t´Ð CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` ½°ÐÌ t ¨Ü\ X` µÈä. # ¤ ¨Ü Ù<\ èt ¤ ¨Ü | äÜ Ýt üíÜ$. 108 Ko 8à ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ ¤l © ©]Ð ¤l ÝX0 ¤l © ©] 0¥D µt @ð CD t´Ð % ¤l © ©]D ´´ôà ø Ð ¬Ý` ¤l| Ý` µÈ ä. # |Ü À| èX$t PAUSE| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à äL ¤tÐ PAUSE| ì |Ü À | Ù è` Ä µÈä. \ 1 ¤l © ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ D.LIST| ì üíÜ$. 2 |Ü À| ÙX$t PAUSE| ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¸X ¬Ýt |Ü À)Èä. 2 16 ü 712 ¬t| XX$t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ITS ¬Ý ©] ¬©X0 3 ÐX ¤l ©D ÝX0 t 16 ( 712) ¼ X| ì üíÜ $. Ý\ t ¬Ý)Èä. 8à ! ÐX ¤l ©D Ý ¬ÝX0 t c, d a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ! tù ¤lX ©t %´ À J<t No D.Titlet \Ü)Èä. ! © ¥XÐ ¤l ÆD L ¤l 8 Ð No disc ¤t)Èä. ! 6 ¤l ä CD t´ ð°ÈD ½ ° 712| ¤t` ƵÈä. CD ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 |Ü À 0¥<\ CDX ¬ÝD |Ü<\ Àܬ µÈä. ITS (`x ¸ Ý)| µt @ð CD t ´X © ¥XÐ ÐX ¸X ¬Ý ©] D Ìä µÈä. ÐX ¸D ¬Ý © ]Ð \ Ä ITS ¬ÝD ÝXt Ý\ ¸Ì ¬Ý` µÈä. ITS \ø<\ ¬Ý ©] Ìä0 ITS| ¬©Xì 100 ¤lLÀ (¤l © ìh), ¤l ù 99 ¸LÀ ¬Ý` µÈä. (CDX-P1250ü CDX-P650 ¨x tÐ ä @ð CD t´Ð \ 24 ¸Ì ¬Ý ©]Ð ¥` µÈ ä.) 1 \ø¨` CD| ¬ÝiÈä. CD| ÝX$t a b| ì üíÜ $. 2 ITS \ø ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ ITS.MD ì üíÜ$. 3 c d| ì ÐX ¸D ä. ÝiÈ 1 |Ü À ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ PAUSE| ì üíÜ$. Ko 109 ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ 4 MEMO| ì ¬ ¬Ý x ¸D ¬ Ý ©]Ð ¥iÈä. Memory complete P À¬ä ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t ¬Ý ©]Ð )Èä. # ¬ ¬Ý x ¸D ¬Ý ©]Ð 0 t a| ¬©` Ä µÈä. 5 ¬Ý ¤t\ ÌD ì üíÜ$. ¥X $t BAND| 8à 100 ¥X ¤lÐ \ pt0 T¨¬Ð ¨P % Ä äÜ È\´ ¤l pt0 % t ¥ $ ¤l pt0 Ð ¹Ð 0] )Èä. ITS ¬Ý ©] ¬Ý ITS ¬Ý 0¥D µt ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð % ¸D è` µÈä. ITS ¬Ý 0¥ D ÝXt @ð CD t´X ITS ¬Ý © ]Ð ¸t ¬Ý)Èä. 1 õ | ÝiÈä. 107 tÀX ¬Ý õX0| 8pt üíÜ $. 2 ITS ¬Ý ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ ITS.P| ì üíÜ$. 3 ITS ¬ÝD ÙX$t ITS.P| ì üí Ü$. \Üñt ÑÈä. tÐ Ý\ Magazine repeat Disc repeat ´X ¬Ý ©]Ð ¸t ¬Ý)Èä. # ITS ¬ÝD èX$t ITS.P| äÜ ì ü íÜ$. # ITS ¬ÝD t ¬ ´Ð ¥ ¸ t Æ<t ITS empty \Ü)Èä. ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð ¸ X0 ITS ¬Ýt Ý´ ½° ITS ¬Ý © ]Ð ¸D ` µÈä. ITS ¬Ýt tø Ý´ <t 2 èÄ\ t ðà, ITS ¬Ýt Ý´ À J<t FUNCD ì üíÜ$. 1 ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð X$ ¸t CD| ¬ÝXt ITS ¬ÝD ÜiÈä. t tÀX ITS ¬Ý ©] ¬Ý| 8pt ü íÜ$. 2 ITS \ø ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ ITS.MD ì üíÜ$. 3 c d| ì ÐX ¸D ä. ÝiÈ 4 ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð ¸D X$t CLEAR| ì üíÜ$. ¬ ¬Ý x ¸t ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð t ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð äL ¸t ¬ Ý)Èä. # ¬ ´Ð ¬Ý ©]Ð ìh ¸t Æ<t ITS empty ¤t à Áx ¬Ýt Ü)Èä. # ¬ ¬Ý x ¸D ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð X0 t b| ¬©` Ä µÈä. 5 ¬Ý ¤t\ ÌD ì üíÜ$. $t BAND| ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð CD X0 ITS ¬Ýt Ý´ À JD LÐÌ ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð ¹ CDX ¨à ¸D ` µÈä. 1 X$ CD| ¬ÝiÈä. CD| ÝX$t a b| ì üíÜ $. 2 ITS \ø ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ ITS.MD ì üíÜ$. 110 Ko ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ 3 ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð ¬ ¬Ý x CDX ¨ à ¸D X$t CLEAR| ì üíÜ $. ¬ ¬Ý x CDX ¨à ¸t ¬Ý ©] Ð à Memory deleted \Ü)È ä. X ... C B A @ t 8 )Èä. í<\ \Ü 4 ¬Ý ¤t\ ÌD ì üíÜ$. 5 äL 8 X\ ä| tÙX$t d| ì üíÜ$. ÐX 8 \ÜÈD L, äL X\ ä | tÙ\ Ä äL 8| ÝX$t d| ì üíÜ$. ¤tÐ ½<\ tÙX$t c| ì üíÜ$. # ¬ ¬Ý x CD| ITS ¬Ý ©]Ð X 0 t b| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ¤l © %X0 ¤l © % 0¥D ¬©Xt \ 10 X 8\ (ITS ¬Ý ©]ü hØ) \ 100 X ¤l ©LÀ CD ©D @ð CD t´Ð %` µÈä. CD ©D %Xt % ©t ¤ t)Èä. 1 ©D %` CD| ¬ÝiÈä. CD| ÝX$t a b| ì üíÜ $. 2 ¤l © % ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCü NEXT| x ÄÐ TTLinD ì üí Ü$. 3 ÐX 8 D ÝX$t ABC| ì üíÜ$. ABC| õt tt äL 8 t \ X)Èä: L³ 8 ( 8), +@ 08L³ 8 (8) # 012| ì +@ 08| µÈä. Ýt %` \ $t BAND| 6 ©D %\ Ä d| ì ä| è ] <\ tÙiÈä. d| \ T tt %\ ©t T¨¬Ð ¥)Èä. 7 ¬Ý ¤t\ ÌD ì üíÜ$. $t BAND| 8à ! CD TEXT 8X @ð CD t´Ð CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° t ¨Ü\ X \ät Cant inputt ¤tp ©D %` ƵÈä. ! © ¥XÐ tù ¤l p ÄÐÄ ©@ T¨¬Ð 0µ0 L8Ð tÄÐ t ù ¤l| © ¥Xн Xt ©t ä Ü \Ü)Èä. ! 100 ¥X ¤lÐ \ pt0 T¨¬Ð ¨P % Ä äÜ È\´ ¤l pt0 %t ¥ $ ¤l pt0 Ð ¹ Ð 0])Èä. 4 L³ 8| ÝX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a| ä | LÈä L³ 8 A B C ... X Y Z , +@ 08 1 2 3 ... @ # < \ ¤t)Èä. b| | LÈä Z Y Ko 111 ¥ 08 @ð CD t´ ¤l © 0¥ ¬©X0 CD TEXT 8X @ð CD t´Ð CD TEXT ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° D𤸠t ü ¸ ©ü @ M¤¸ ¤t| X` µÈä. M¤¸ 32X 8ôä 8t M¤¸X 8À D ü Ä] M ¤¸| |½<\ ¤ld` µÈä. 1 © ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t TITLED ì ü 2 ÐX ©D ¤t X0 t t ù ¼D ì üíÜ$. FORM1 FORM3 ¼ Ù D.TTL ¤l ©D ¤tiÈä. D.ART ¤l D𤸠tD ¤tiÈ ä. T.TTL ¸ ©D ¤tiÈä. T.ART ¸ D𤸠tD ¤tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. FORM2 ¼ Ù TTL1 ¤l ©ü ¸ ©D ¤ti Èä. TTL2 ¤l ©ü ¤l D𤸠tD ¤tiÈä. TTL3 ¸ ©ü ¸ D𤸠tD ¤ tiÈä. SCROLL ¤t ©D ¤ldiÈä. 8à ! 8 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. ! © ¨ÜÐ ¤l ¸D ÝX0 t a/b/c/d| ¬©` ƵÈä. ! FORM2 ¤t| Ý\ ½° ©@ 248LÀ ¤t)Èä. 112 Ko ! CD TEXT ¤l ¤l ©, D𤸠t ¸ ©ü @ M¤¸ ô| T )\ CD 0¥ Èä. ! CD TEXT ¤lÐ ¹ ô %´ À J<t No xxxx \Ü)Èä (, No artist name). ! ¬ ¬Ý x ¤lX ©t %´ À J<t No titlet \Ü)Èä. U L T ¬©X0 t 0¥@ tù 0¥D ÀÐX @ð CD t´ÐÌ ¬©` µÈä. COMP (U) ü DBE (Ù L T) 0¥ D ¬©Xt @ð CD t´X ¬Ý ¬´Ü ÈD p` µÈä. 0¥Ð P À p èÄ µÈä. COMP 0¥@ @ ühÐ \ Lü Üì´ LX % 8 ð¤| piÈä. DBE \ LD ¬Ý X0 t L ¨D piÈä. tù 0¥ D Ý` L 0¥X ¨ü| Á Ux\ Ä è x ¸ CDX ¬ÝD \ \ ¥ Áܤ ¨ü| ©t üíÜ$. 1 COMP/DBE ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNC NEXT| x ÄÐ COMP| ì üíÜ$. # @ð CD t´Ð COMP/DBE 0¥D ÀÐXÀ Jp tù 0¥D ÝXt No COMP \Ü)Èä. 2 ¨ ¬©X $D ÝX$t COMP| ì üíÜ$. COMP| õt tt äL $t \ X)Èä: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFDBE 1DBE 2 ¥ 09 TV TV ¬©X0 2 1 3 4Ü| ÝX$t BAND| ì üíÜ $. TV-1 TV-2 ÐX 4Ü ¤t LLÀ BAND| ì üíÜ$. 4 Ù ÝD äX$t c d| à X ì üíÜ$. Dt èÄ<\ iÈä. FORM1 t 00| ¬©Xì Ää TV | ´ ` µÈä. ( ÙÐ \ 8\ ´©@ TV X ¬© $ | 8pt üíÜ$. t Ð TV X ¬© $ Ð $ ´©ü ÄÄ\ t 00| t©t TV ÙD ` ½°Ð \ ô| õiÈä. 1 4Ü \Ü TV ´¤ 4ÜÐ ÝÈÀ \Ü )Èä. 2 ¬ $ 8 \Ü Ý\ ¬ $ ´©t \Ü)Èä. 3 D \Ü TV ´¤ DÐ ÝÈÀ \Ü )Èä. 1 TDD ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. Televisiont ¤t LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. \ 5 É ÝD äX$t } 1 Ä c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. 3 # É ÝD èX$t c d| àX ì üíÜ$. TV à ¬© ) 0¥ Tt äLü @ 0¥äD À à µÈä: BSSM (\à )¡m ð T¨¬)chLIST (¬ $ D ©]) 1 BSSM (\à )¡m ð T¨¬) BSSM| Ù ÀX$t BSSM| ì üíÜ$. Åt Ìt ¤t ¬ $ D ©] ¨Ü\ X)Èä. 2 chLIST (¬ $ D ©]) ¬ $ D ©]X ÙÐ t ¤ tÀX ¬ $ D ©]Ð D ÝX0| 8pt üíÜ$. 8à 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. Ko 113 ¥ 09 TV )¡m ¥ ÝX0 ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16 ( 712)D t t )¡mD 12LÀ } 0µÜ tÄ Ð ¼D \ Ì ìÄ )¡mD Ý` µÈä. 1 16 ( 712)D ¤t X$t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 16 ( 712)t À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 0µ ¥XÐ ¥` )¡mD ><t tù ¬ $ 8 \p¬À Jà H LLÀ ¬ $ Ý ¼16 ( 712) D tà x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. ¬© Ý\ 8 ¬ $ 8 \Ü Ð x\ äL Ä ÁÜ\ À)Èä. Ý\ )¡m@ T¨¬Ð ¥)Èä. Ð Ù|\ ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16 ( 712)D tt T¨¬Ð ¥´ )¡ mD Ý` µÈä. 8à ! )¡m@ P X TV 4ÜÐ t 6L À, 12LÀ T¨¬Ð ¥` µÈ ä. ! a@ b| ¬©Xì ¬ $ Ý ¼ 16 712Ð `ù )¡mD Ý` Ä µ Èä. ¬ $ D ©]Ð D ÝX0 ¬ $ D ©]@ ¬ $ D ©]D ôì üp t X| Ýt à` Ä] iÈä. 1 ¬ $ D ©] ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ chLIST| ì üíÜ$. 114 Ko 2 16 ü 712 ¬t| XX$t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX DD ÝX0 t 16 ( 712) ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. 8à ÐX DD ÝX0 t c, d a| t© ` Ä µÈä. ¥ 10 DVD t´ ¤l ¬ÝX0 12 3 3 ¤l| ÝX$t a b| ì ü íÜ$. ¤l Æ ¤l 8 tð )È ä. # ¤l| Á ÝX0 t 16 ¼D ¬ ©` Ä µÈä. 4 h¬ 0 0| äX$t c d| Ä ì üíÜ$. FORM1 t 00| ¬©Xì Ää DVD t´ @ð DVD t´| ´` µÈ ä. ÙÐ \ 8\ ´©@ tù DVD t ´ @ð DVD t´X ¬© $ | 8pt üíÜ$. t Ð DVD t´ @ð DVD t´X ¬© $ Ð $ ´©ü ÄÄ\ t 00| t© t DVD ÙD ` ½°Ð \ ô| õiÈä. 1 ¤l 8 \Ü @ð DVD t´| ¬©Xà D ½° ¬ ¬Ý x ¤l| \ÜiÈä. 2 © 8 \Ü DVD D$ ¬Ý Ð ¬ ¬Ý x ©D ôì Èä. 3 U0/¸ 8 \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x U0/¸t \Ü)Èä. 4 ¬Ý Ü \Ü ¬ ¬Ý x U0/¸X ¬Ý ½ü Ü t \Ü)Èä. 1 @ð DVD t´| ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. DVD ¤t LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 ¬´Ü ¨D pX$t VOLUMED ¬ ©iÈä. ühD tp ® L Ü üíÜ$. \ 4 5 äx U0( ¸)\ ^<\ tð0 ¤\ tð0| äX$t c d | ì üíÜ$. d| tt äL U0( ¸)X Ü <\ tÈä. c| tt ¬ U0( ¸)X Ü <\ tÈä. äÜ tt t U0( ¸)\ tÈ ä. à DVD t´ Ù ) DVD t´ 0¥ Tt äLü @ 0¥ äD Àà µÈä: DVD D$ D$ CD ¬Ý Ù H RPT (õ ¬Ý)D.LIST (¤l © ©]) PAUSE (|Ü À)TTLin (¤l © %) CD ¬Ý ÙH RPT (õ ¬Ý)RDM (4 ¬Ý) SCAN (¤ ¬Ý)D.LIST (¤l © ©])PAUSE (|Ü À)TTLin (¤l © %)ITS.P (ITS ¬Ý)ITS.M (ITS \ø) 8à ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. Ko 115 ¥ 10 DVD t´ (¤l © % ¨Ü(TTLin) ITS \ø ¨Ü(ITS.M)| ÝD L, ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌD À JµÈ ä.) ! D.LIST, TTLin, ITS.P ITS.M@ @ð DVD t´| ¬©` LÌ ¤t )È ä. ¬Ý õX0 1 õ ¨Ü| íÜ$. ÝX$t FUNCD ì ü 2 õ | ÝX$t RPT| ì üí Ü$. DVD D$ ¬Ý ÙH ! Title repeat À ¬ ©Ì õ ! Chapter repeat À ¬ U0Ì õ ! Disc repeat ¬ ¤l õ ¬Ý D$ CD CD ¬Ý ÙH RPT| | L Èä õ ¬Ýt Àà ¼Ð D õiÈä. 4 \ ¸ ¬ÝX0 1 4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ RDMD ì üíÜ$. 2 4 ¬ÝD ÙX$t RDMD ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸t 4 \ ¬ Ý)Èä. # 4 ¬ÝD èX$t RDMD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 2 ¤ ¬ÝD ÙX$t SCAND ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¸X L 10 ¬ Ý)Èä. 3 ÐX ¸| >@ Ä, ¤ ¬ÝD è X$t SCAND ì üíÜ$. \Üñt ¼ÑÈä. ¸t Ä ¬Ý)Èä. # ¤ ¨Ü Ù<\ èt ¤ ¨Ü | äÜ Ýt üíÜ$. 8à ! CDX ¤t ]t ¸t äÜ Á<\ ¬Ý)Èä. ! ¤ ¬Ýt 8 D L ¤ ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ SCANt À©È ä. ¤l ¬Ý |Ü ÀX0 1 |Ü À ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ PAUSE| ì üíÜ$. 2 |Ü À| ÙX$t PAUSE| ì ü íÜ$. \Üñt ÑÈä. ¬ ¸X ¬Ýt |Ü À)Èä. # |Ü À| èX$t PAUSE| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 8à äL ¤tÐ PAUSE| ì |Ü À | Ù è` Ä µÈä. 8à 4 ¬Ýt 8 D L 4 ¨Ü Ì t 0ø ¤tÐ RDMt À©Èä. CDX ¸ ¤X0 1 ¤ ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x Ä Ð SCAND ì üíÜ$. 116 Ko ITS ¬Ý ©], ¤l © %, ¤l © ©] 0¥ t©X0 @ð DVD t´ ¥) t 00| t© t CD| ¬ÝX ÙH äL 0¥D ¬©` µÈä. Ù )@ @ð CD t´ @ Ù|iÈä. @ð CD t´ D 8 pt üíÜ$. ¥ 11 $$ p Ù ¨Ü \ t 00 P À Ù ¨Ü| õiÈä: 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü(NW) \ ¨Ü (STD). ÐX \ ¨Ü ¬t| X` µÈä. 0Ð DSP $@ \ ¨Ü (STD)\ À´ µÈä. (78 tÀX DSP $ ¨Ü\ XX0| 8pt üíÜ $.) ! 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü(NW) 3 èt @ð p@ àü, ü, ü(4Ü) | ¬ÝX0 \ Ž ¤<ä t| Ž<\ lÙX © Ì p\ t è´Ä @ð ¤<ä ܤ\D l1` Ä] iÈä. 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü ü | X ´` Ä] $¸Ìl@ Ü , 0¥ü @ð p, @ð ¤<ä ܤ\Ð uìx P X 0 ¥D õiÈä. ! \ ¨Ü(STD) ) ¤<ä@ Ä) ¤ <ä\ tè´Ä 4 ¤<ä ܤ\ü ) ¤<ä@ Ä) ¤<ä °|\ tè ´Ä 6 ¤<ä ܤ\ lt ¥iÈä. \ ¨Ü Ù( ´Ð ä° } ¬ä x L¥D ¬ÝX0 t õ L¥ ´ 0¥D õiÈä. :t@ 0¥t STD ¨ÜÐÌ © ä D XøXp Ùt STD ¨ÜÐ Ì ©ä D XøiÈä. ! Èl ÀÜÀ J@ 0¥ü Ù@ NW @ STD ¨Ü ¨PÐ õµ<\ ¬©) Èä. 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü äL $/pD \ h<\h } ø8 p L¥D Ý1` µÈä. ! X Ý 0¥ ¬©X0 (POSI) ! 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 (BAL) ! Ü , 0¥ t©X0 (T.AL) ! $¸Ìl pX0 (NW) ! t|t á ÝX0 (EEQ) ! t|t á p (EQ 1) ! 13 4Ü ø= t|t pX0 (EQ 2) \ ¨Ü } $$ pX0 ! Ù( 00¬ P´ ñü @ <\ xt t 00Ð Ðt õÀ JD L t 00X È tl\\8 0 ¨Ü\ ÌDÈä. t t 0µ ¨à $$ $t p )Èä. $$ $D DÌD L $D 144 tÀÐ 0]t üíÜ$. äL 0¥ä@ Ù( Ð 0| ä° ì |À Ù( ´X L¥x ¹1Ð Q ܤ0 t } $$ ܤ\D p` Ä] iÈä. ! t|t á ÝX0 (EEQ) ! X Ý 0¥ ¬©X0 (POSI) ! t|t á p (EQ 1) Ù ¨Ü Èl 8<\ $$ pX0 t ¬© $ $ D X X0 t äL Èl| ¬©iÈä. :t@ 0¥t NW ¨ÜÐÌ © ä D XøXp Ùt NW ¨ÜÐÌ ©ä D XøiÈä. äL $/pD \ h<\h } ø8 p L¥D Ý1` µÈä. ! X Ý 0¥ ¬©X0 (POSI) ! 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 (F/B) ! °| % ¬©X0 (SW1) ! °| $ pX0 (SW2) Ko 117 ¥ 11 $$ p ! ) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $X0 (HPF F) ! Ä) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $X0 (HPF R) ! Ù TA EQ(Ù Ü , Ù t |t ) ! t|t á ÝX0 (EEQ) ! t|t á p (EQ 1) ! 13 4Ü ø= t|t pX0 (EQ 2) F/BLOUDSFCEQ 1EQ 2ASLPOSI T.ALA.EQSW1SW2HPF FHPF R SLA 8à 0¥ t 0¥ä@ ܤ\t xx è¥Ð Þ ´ ¬´Ü| pX0 t ©X t© ` µÈä. ! BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X0 (BBE) ! ¬´Ü T 0¥ pX0 (LOUD) ! L¥ ´@ BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X0 (SFC) ! Ù ¬´Ü ¨ p 0¥ ¬©X0 (ASL) ! LÐ ¨ pX0 (SLA) ! 30 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈä. (13 4Ü ø= t|t ¨Ü(EQ 2), Ü , p ¨Ü(T.AL) $¸Ìl p ¨Ü(NW)| Ý\ ½° ¤t Ù <\ ÌD À JµÈä.) ! °| %t °| % ¨Ü(SW1) Ð õà D ½°ÐÌ SW2 ¤ t)Èä. ! FM | LÐ<\ ÝD ½° SLA ¤tÀ JµÈä. X $$ p ) $$ Tt äLü @ 0¥äD µÈä: Àà BALNWPOSIT.ALEQ 1EQ 2BBE LOUDASLSLA Ý 0¥ ¬©X0 T± ð¤ì´ LD ô¥X0 t t ¤L$ tøÀ X| UX >@ Ä ¬© ø L¥X YÐ XXÄ] $ iÈä. X Ý 0¥@ ¤<äX % ¨ D Ù<\ p` Ä] Xp è X @ XÐ Þ´ Àð ÜD ½ iÈä. 1 POSI| ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. POSIt ¤tÐ À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 X Ý ¨Ü| üíÜ$. 118 Ko ÝX$t POSI| ì ¥ 11 $$ p 3 è X| üíÜ$. ¼ \Ü ÝX$t tù ¼D ì X ^ |½ FR ^ $x½ FRONT ^ ALL ¨à # Ý\ è X| èX$t @ ¼D äÜ ì üíÜ$. # NW ¨Ü Ý ½° ALLD Ý` Æ µÈä. 8à è X| ÝX0 t a, b, c d| ¬©` Ä µÈä. ¼ \Ü X c ^ |½ d ^ $x½ a ^ b ¨à 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 Ù(X Ð ¨P ѹ\ ÁÜÐ tÁ x è X½t Ä] 8ð¤| Ý ` µÈä. 1 8𤠨Ü| üíÜ$. \ FL 2 /° ¤<ä 8ð¤| pX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä /° ¤<äX 8ð ¤ |½ $x½<\ tÙiÈä. /° ¤<ä 8ð¤ |½Ð $x ½<\ tÙXt Balance L25 Balance R25 \Ü )Èä. 8ð¤ p 0¥ ¬©X0 Ù(X Ð ¨P ѹ\ ÁÜÐ tÁ x è X½t Ä] tT/8ð¤ | Ý` µÈä. 1 tT/8𤠨Ü| AUDIO| ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t 2 )/Ä) ¤<äX 8ð¤| pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä )/Ä) ¤<äX 8ð¤ ^¤\ tÙiÈä. )/Ä) ¤<ä 8ð¤ ^Ð ¤\ tÙ Xt Fader F25 Fader R25 \Ü)Èä. # ¤<ä| 2 Ì ¬©` ½° Fader FR 00t \ $ Èä. 3 /° ¤<ä 8ð¤| pX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä /° ¤<äX 8ð ¤ |½ $x½<\ tÙiÈä. /° ¤<ä 8ð¤ |½Ð $x ½<\ tÙXt Balance L25 Balance R25 \Ü )Èä. Ü , 0¥ t©X0 Ü , 0¥@ ¤<ä@ è X ¬t X p¬| piÈä. ÝX$t AUDIO| ì Ko 119 ¥ 11 $$ p 1 T.AL| ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. T.ALt ¤tÐ À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 1 T.AL| ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. T.ALt ¤tÐ À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 Ü , ¨Ü| üíÜ$. ÝX$t T.ALD ì 2 Ü , ¨Ü| üíÜ$. 3 Ü , 0¥D ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t tù ¼D # X Ý ¨Ü(POSI)Ð FL FRD ÝX À JXD ½°Ð T.ALt D\1T)Èä. ¼ Ü , INTL 0 A.TA Ù Ü , CUSTM Þ¤ # Ü , 0¥D D0 t Ù|\ ¼ D äÜ ì üíÜ$. # NW ¨Ü Ý ½° A.TA| Ý` Æ µÈä. # Ì| Ù TA@ EQ À J<t A.TA D\1T)Èä. 4 Ü , ¨Ü| èX$t BAND| ì üíÜ$. 8à ! INTL X Ü õ Ü , Èä. ! A.TA Ù TA EQÐ Xt Ý1 Ü , Èä. (128 tÀX Ù TA EQ (Ù Ü , Ù t|t ) | 8pt üíÜ$.) ! CUSTM@ Á ¬© Ý1` p Ü , Èä. Ü , 0¥ pX0 ¤<ä@ Ý X ¬tX p¬| p ` µÈä. ! p Ü ,@ CUSTMÐ 0µ)È ä. 120 Ko ÝX$t T.ALD ì # X Ý ¨Ü(POSI)Ð FL FRD ÝX À JXD ½°Ð T.ALt D\1T)Èä. 3 p` ¤<ä| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä ¤<ä äLü @ \ Ý)Èä: High Left (@ |½)High Right ( @ $x½)Mid Right ( $x ½)Mid Left ( |½)Low Left (®@ |½)Low Right (®@ $ x½) Front Left () |½)Front Right () $x½)Rear Right (Ä) $x½) Rear Left (Ä) |½)Sub. W (° |) # °| %t ¼8 D ½° Sub. W| Ý` ƵÈä. 4 Ý\ ¤<ä@ è X ¬tX ©D pX0 t a b| ì üíÜ $. a b| | LÈä p¬ Xp iÈä. p¬ Xp hÐ 0| 400.0cm 0.0cmt ¤t)Èä. # Ù|\ )<\ äx ¤<ääÐ Ä p` µÈä. \ p¬ 5 Ü , ¨Ü| èX$t BAND| ì üíÜ$. ¥ 11 $$ p $¸Ìl 0¥Ð Xì p ¥\ ä À $¸Ìl 0¥D t©t äL ä À| p` µÈä. ¬Ý ü 4Ü@ ð° ¤<ä 00X ¹1Ð 0| pt ü íÜ$. ᢲᵒ# +gE, ⡖ↇ#⦦㎶⋂#᳞ᖆ ㉟ඦ ᢲᵒ Á ¤<ä 00X % à8Ð t Á( Á, íÁ)D X` µÈä. ¤<ä ¬t X ¬´Ü ð1t UXÀ JD L Á XD ÜÄX t µÈä. th<\ h ¤<ä ¬tX ¬´Ü ð1t Ä µÈä. $¸Ìl p ❢+gE2rfw1, ⦦㎶⋂# +K}, KSI#Ⳓ᎒#⦦㎶⋂ 0¸0 HPF/LPF 0¸0(D0 Ä 0¸0) ¤< ä 00 ¬tX ¬´Ü ð1D p` µÈä. ! t 0¸0 ü 1 %À D L(® D L) Ä à8X pÜL(dB) l0 | ÀÅÈä (è: dB/oct.). t 0¸ 0 ` ] à8 T Ît Ä)È ä. OSI#Ⳓ᎒#⦦㎶⋂ ¬Ý ü 4Ü HPF(Xt (¤ D0) LPF(\° (¤ D0)| p` L (è ü ¤<ä 00X ¬Ý ü 4Ü| $iÈä. ! HPF $ üX D ½(®@ ü ) üäD (èt @ üäÌ µüXÄ] iÈä. ! LPF $ üX ½(@ ü) üäD (èt ®@ üäÌ µ üXÄ] iÈä. \ $¸Ìl 0¥@ $$ à8| ä\ ü 4ÜÐ °Ü¨ Ä ÄÄX ¤<ä 00| µt D ¬Ý` Ä] iÈä. ø ÄÐ ¤<ä 00X ¹1Ð QX0 t ¬Ý ü 4Ü(\° (¤ D0 X t (¤ D0 t©), ¨, Á 0À ä ÀÐ t P\ pD ` µ Èä. ¨ ¬Ý ¨ü ¤<ä 00 ¬tX (t| ` µÈä. ( À (è ü p ! Ä) ¸tÐ ®@ Ð tùX ¤< ä| $X` ½° L LPF (è ü| $Xt t¤ ¬´Ü ¬´ ¤ ½Ð $ ü ôÑÈä. L LPF (è ü| 100 Hz tX\ $X t ÁiÈä. ! @ ¤<äÐ \ \ % Ì $@ |<\ ®@ ¤<äX \ % Ì $ôä ®µÈ ä. M HPF H HPF (è ü D \ ôä ®ät %\ t¤ à8 %<\ xt ¤<ä Á Ä µÈ ä. ¨ p Î@ E0X 0ø ü Ð ì iÈä. < ¨ pD \ ÄÐ @ ¨ pD Xà ø ÄÐ ®@ ¨ pD \ t üíÜ$. Ko 121 ¥ 11 $$ p 0¸0 p ! 0¸0Ð t @ D $(DÌ\ 0¸0)\ät üÀ ¤<ä 00 ¬tX -<\ xt É\ ü QõD » 0 }µÈä. ! 0¸0Ð t p D $(\ 0 ¸0)\ät üÀ ¤<ä 00 ¬tX ¬ ´Ü ð1t Ét8 ¬´Ü ¬ ü 0 }µÈä. ! 0¸0| 0 dB/oct. (Pass)<\ $\ä t $$ à8 D0| \ µüt D 0X ¥t ƵÈä. Á p ½ D0X P( À t -12 dB/oct.\ $ ÈD ½° D0 (è üÐX Á @ 180Ä íÁ<\ À½)Èä. t ½° Á X \ ¸´ ¬´Ü ð1D ` µÈä. ⢿Ⅻ#➮Ⅻ ⚗Ⅻ#➮Ⅻ Ⳓ⢺ 2 p` ¤<ä 00(D0)| tù ¼D ì üíÜ$. ¼ ¤<ä 00(D0)| Lp` µÈ ä. ¤<ä 00(D0) Lpt ¤<ä Ð T tÁ ¬´Ü %À JµÈä. ! Ý\ ¤<ä 00(D0)| LpXt MUTE \tp pD ` ƵÈä. ! ¹ ¤<ä 00(D0) Lp ½° ÐÄ äx ¤<ä 00(D0)X ä À | p` µÈä. 1 $¸Ìl p ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NW| ì üíÜ$. 122 Ko ¤<ä 00(D0) L LPF ®@ ¤<ä LPF M HPF ¤<ä HPF M LPF ¤<ä LPF H HPF @ ¤<ä HPF 3 Ý ¤<ä 00(D0)| LpX0 t MUTE| ì üíÜ$. MUTE ¤tÐ \ Èä. # Lp| èX$t MUTE| äÜ ì ü íÜ$. $¸Ìl pX0 1 $¸Ìl p ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NW| ì üíÜ$. 2 p` ¤<ä 00(D0)| tù ¼D ì üíÜ$. ¼ ¤<ä 00(D0) LpX0 ÝX$t ÝX$t ¤<ä 00(D0) L LPF ®@ ¤<ä LPF M HPF ¤<ä HPF M LPF ¤<ä LPF H HPF @ ¤<ä HPF 3 Ý\ ¤<ä 00(D0)X (è ü (P( ü)| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. L LPF: 31.540506380100125 160200 (Hz) M HPF: 31.540506380100125 160200 (Hz) M LPF: 1.622.53.15456.38 1012.516 (kHz) H HPF: 1.622.53.15456.38 1012.516 (kHz) ¥ 11 $$ p 4 Ý\ ¤<ä 00(D0)X ¨D p X$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä Ý\ ¤<ä 00 (D0)X ¨t Xp iÈä. ¨t Xp hÐ 0| 0dB 24dBt ¤t)Èä. L LPF| ÝD LÌ ¨t Xp hÐ 0| +6 -24 ¤t)Èä. 6 Ý\ ¤<ä 00(D0)X ÁD X X$t PHASE| ì üíÜ$. PHASE| | LÈä Á ü íÁ <\ Át X)Èä. # Ù|\ )<\ äx ¤<ä 00(D0)Ð \ äÀÄ p` µÈä. 7 $¸Ìl , p ¨Ü| èX$t BAND| ì üíÜ$. °| % ¬©X0 t 00Ð °| %t ¥)´ < p t %D ÙXp è` µÈä. t 00Ð °| ð°ÈD ½° °| %D üÜ0 Èä. °| % Á@ Áü íÁ<\ X ` µÈä. 1 °| % ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO NEXT| x ÄÐ SW1D ì üíÜ$. # °| %t °| % ¨Ü(SW1) Ð õà D ½°ÐÌ SW2 ¤t )Èä. # °| %D èX$t SW1D äÜ ì üíÜ$. 3 °| %X ÁD ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. íÁ ÁD ÝX$t c| ì üíÜ$. Á ÁD ÝX$t d| ì üíÜ$. \ 5 Ý\ ¤<ä 00(D0)X 0¸0| ÝX$t SLOPE| ì üíÜ$. L LPF: -12 -18 -6 (dB/oct.) M HPF: -12 -18Pass (0) -6 (dB/oct.) M LPF: -12Pass (0) -6 (dB/oct.) H HPF: -12 -6 (dB/oct.) 2 °| %D ÙX$t SW1D ì üíÜ$. SUB.W ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. t °| %t Ù)Èä. °| $ pX0 °| %t Ý´ D ½°, ° |X (è ü@ % ¨D p` µÈä. 1 °| $ ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO NEXT| x ÄÐ SW2| ì üíÜ$. 2 (è ü| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä äLü @ \ (è ü Ý)Èä. 506380100125 (Hz) t ½° Ý\ Ð üôä ®@ üÌ °|Ð %)Èä. 3 °|X % ¨D pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä °|X ¨t Xp iÈä. ¨t Xp hÐ 0| +6 -24t ¤t)È ä. Xt (¤ D0 ¬©X0 °| % ü X Lt ) Ä) ¤<äÐ ¬ÝÀ JÄ] X$t HPF (Xt (¤ D0) | ÙiÈä. Ý \ X üôä @ üÌ ) Ä) ¤<äÐ %)Èä. Ko 123 ¥ 11 $$ p ) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $ X0 1 Xt (¤ D0 ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO@ NEXT| x ÄÐ HPF F| ì ü íÜ$. 2 Xt (¤ D0| ÙX$t HPF F| ì üíÜ$. HPF ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. Xt ( ¤ D0 t ÙiÈä. # Xt (¤ D0| èX$t HPF F| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 3 (è ü| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä äLü @ \ (è ü Ý)Èä. 506380100125 (Hz) Ý\ X üôä @ üÌ ) Ä) ¤<äÐ %)Èä. Ä) ¤<äÐ Xt (¤ D0 $ X0 ¬©X0 Ù t|t Ù TA@ EQ(128 t ÀX Ù TA EQ(Ù Ü , Ù t|t ) | 8pt üíÜ$)Ð X t Ý1 t|t á Èä. Ù t|t 0¥D Dp $ µÈ ä. 1 Ù t|t | Ù/è ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO@ NEXT| x ÄÐ A.EQ| ì üíÜ$. # Ì| Ù TA@ EQ À J<t A.EQ D\1T)Èä. 2 Ù t|t | ÙX$t A.EQ| ì üíÜ$. Auto EQ ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # Ù t|t | èX$t A.EQ| äÜ ì üíÜ$. t|t á ÝX0 1 AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| P ì ü íÜ$. t|t 0¥D µt Ù(X ´ L¥ ¹1Ð Þ LÉD p` µÈä. ¸àÀ } t©` Ä] 7 ÀX t |t á t ¥´ µÈä. 2 Xt (¤ D0 ¨Ü| HPF RD ì üíÜ$. 1 l´ t|t ¨Ü\ XX$t EEQ| ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t 3 Xt (¤ D0| ÙX$t HPF RD ì üíÜ$. HPF ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. Xt ( ¤ D0 t ÙiÈä. # Xt (¤ D0| èX$t HPF RD äÜ ì üíÜ$. 4 (è ü| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä äLü @ \ (è ü Ý)Èä. 506380100125 (Hz) Ý\ X üôä @ üÌ ) Ä) ¤<äÐ %)Èä. 124 Ù t|t Ko 2 CSTM2@ äx Ý(á NEXT| ì üíÜ$. )D XX$t 3 ÐX t|t á D ¤t X 0 t tù ¼D ì üíÜ$. ¼ t|t CLRTY ÑL RHYTM ¬ì SENS üh NRRW L FLAT « á ¥ 11 $$ p ¼ t|t CSTM1 ¬© $ 1 á CSTM2 ¬© $ 2 8à ! c d| ì t|t á D ( <\ Ý` Ä µÈä. ! 8 tÁ tù 0¥D ¬©XÀ J<t ¤ t Ù<\ t<\ ÌDÈ ä. t|t á p õ¥ XÜ $ t|t á @ FLATD xXà ø8 pD ` µÈ ä (XY¤ ´). 1 ø= t|t ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO| x ÄÐ EQ 1| ì üíÜ$. 2 t|t á D | ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t c d 3 t|t á D pX$t a b | ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä t|t á t Ä<\ iÈä. t|t á t hÐ 0| +6 -5 ( -6) t ¤t)Èä. # Ý t|t á Ð 0| ä p ì|ÑÈä. # ¨à ü 0<\ $ t|t á @ p` ƵÈä. p CUSTOM1ü CUSTOM2 t|t á X ½° 4ÜX ¨D p` µÈä. ! LÐÈä ÄÄX CUSTOM1 á D Ý1` µÈä. (´¥ CD t´@ @ð CD t´ Ù<\ Ù|\ t| t \ pÄ] $´ µÈä.) CUSTOM2 DÌ äx á D Ý` ½ ° pX$t t|t á $t CUSTOM1Ð 0µ)Èä. ! ¨à LÐÐ õµx CUSTOM2á D Ì ä µÈä. CUSTOM2á D Ý` ½° pX$t CUSTOM2á t 1à) Èä. \ ! CUSTOM1ü CUSTOM2 ¬© p X t|t á Èä. 13 4Ü ø = t|t | ¬©Xì p ÅD ` µÈä. ! FLAT Ýt ¬´ÜÐ \ ôDt @ ¥iÈä. t 0¥@ FLAT@ t|t á äX Ñiä ¬tÐ L Þ@ ¨ü| õX t|t á D ´´ ô0 t ä° ©iÈä. 13 4Ü ø= t|t X0 1 p` t|t á D ÝiÈä. ^ tÀX t|t á ÝX0| 8 pt üíÜ$. 2 13 4Ü ø= t|t ¨Ü| ÝX $t AUDIO| x ÄÐ EQ 2| ì üíÜ $. 3 p` t|t 4Ü| ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä t|t 4Ü äLü @ \ Ý)Èä. 50801252003155008001.25k 2k3.15k5k8k12.5k (Hz) 4 t|t 4Ü ¨D pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä t|t 4ÜX ¨t Xp iÈä. ¨t Xp hÐ 0| +6 -6t ¤t)Èä. # äx 4Ü| Èä. ÝXì ¨D p` µ 5 13 4Ü ø= t|t ¨Ü| èX $t BAND| ì üíÜ$. Ko 125 ¥ 11 $$ p BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X0 BBE| t©h<\h ¬Ý Ð ÝX à ü 1X Àð Áü Äí ¸(| t°X 0 \ Á ô àLí T 0¥X pi D µt üD ph<\h ÐLÐ Áù ü\ LD ¬Ý` µÈä. t 0¥ D µt ÈX |t õðD èX ü @ ätù\ L¥D ¬Ý` µÈä. 8à BBE Sound Inc.X |t<¤ XРȵ Èä. BBE BBE Sound Inc.X Á\ Èä. BBE ¬´Ü ¨ pX0 BBE ¬´Ü \8ñ 0 D µt BBEX ¨D p` µÈä. 1 BBE| ÝX$t AUDIO@ NEXT| x ÄÐ BBE| ì üíÜ$. 2 BBED ÙX$t BBE| ì üíÜ$. # BBE| èX$t BBE| äÜ ì üíÜ $. 3 BBE ¨D pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä BBEX ¨t Xp iÈä. ¨t Xp hÐ 0| +4 -4t ¤t)Èä. ¬´Ü T 0¥ pX0 ¬´Ü T 0¥@ ®@ ühÐ ü íü àü íX }\ LD ôt È ä. 1 LOUD| ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. LOUD À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ $. 126 Ko 2 ¬´Ü T ¨Ü| ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t LOUD| 3 ¬´Ü T 0¥D ÙX$t LOUD| ì üíÜ$. Loudness ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # ¬´Ü T ¨Ü| èX$t LOUD| äÜ ì üíÜ$. L¥ ´@ BBE ¬´Ü ¬©X 0 SFC (L¥ ´) ¤$, tý, è¸ @, Ô ñX |x L¥D ¬X $ À \ø¨D ìhXà µÈä. t 0¥D µt Ù(Ð $ À \ø¨D µt ä L¥D ¬Ý` µÈä. BBE| t©h<\h ¬Ý Ð ÝX à ü 1X Àð Áü Äí ¸(| t°X 0 \ Á ô àLí T 0¥X pi D µt üD ph<\h ÐLÐ Áù ü\ LD ¬Ý` µÈä. t 0¥ D µt ÈX |t õðD èX ü @ ätù\ L¥D ¬Ý` µÈä. 8à BBE Sound Inc.X |t<¤ XРȵ Èä. BBE BBE Sound Inc.X Á\ Èä. L¥ \ø¨ ÝX0 1 L¥ ´ ¨Ü| ÝX$t AUDIO| x ÄÐ SFC| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX L¥ \ø¨D ù ¼D ì üíÜ$. ¼ ¨ü STUDIO ¤$ CLUB tý HALL è¸@ ÝX0 t t ¥ 11 $$ p ¼ ¨ü DOME Ô BBE BBE # Ý\ L¥ \ø¨D èX$t Ù|\ ¼D äÜ ì üíÜ$. # c d| ì L¥ \ø¨D (< \ Ý` Ä µÈä. 2 Ù ¬´Ü ¨ p ¨Ü| t ASLD ì üíÜ$. ÝX0 3 ÐX ASL ¨D ÝX$t ASLD ì üíÜ$. ASLD | LÈä ASL ¨t äLü @ \ Ý)Èä. OFF (¼Ð)Low ( )Mid-Low ( ) Mid ()Mid-High (à)High (à) \ BBE ¬´Ü ¨ pX0 BBE ¬´Ü \8ñ 0 D µt BBEX ¨D p` µÈä. 1 BBE| ÝX$t AUDIO@ SFC| x ÄÐ BBE| ì üíÜ$. 2 BBED ÙX$t BBE| ì üíÜ$. # BBE| èX$t BBE| äÜ ì üíÜ $. 3 BBE ¨D pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä BBEX ¨t Xp iÈä. ¨t Xp hÐ 0| +4 -4t ¤t)Èä. Ù ¬´Ü ¨ p 0¥ ¬ ©X0 ´ Ù( ´X L@ ´ Ä@ Ä\ ìtÐ 0| ì|ÑÈä. Ù ¬´Ü ¨ p 0¥ (ASL) @ äX ÀX LD ÜXì Lt äÀt üh ¨D Ù< \ ܵÈä. ASLX Ä (L ¨Ð \ üh ¨X ÀÙ) äL \ À ¨\ $` µÈä. 1 ASLD ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. ASLt À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 8à OFF Ý ½°| xXà ASL ¨Ü Ì t ASLt 0ø ¤tÐ À©Èä. LÐ ¨ pX0 SLA (LÐ ¨ p) | µt LÐD X` ½° Ý` Ä ühX ©\ ÀT| )ÀX0 t LÐX üh ¨D p` µÈä. ! LÐ $@ À½À J FM X ü h ¨D 0 <\ $ȵÈä. 1 p` LÐ üh ¨D FM üh ¨ü DPiÈä. 2 SLA| ¤t X0 t AUDIO| x ÄÐ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. SLA À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. # FM | LÐ<\ ÝD ½° SLA ¤tÀ JµÈä. 3 SLA ¨Ü| Ü$. ÝX$t SLA| ì üí 4 LÐX ühD pX$t a b| ì üíÜ$. a b| | LÈä LÐ üht X p iÈä. LÐX üht Xp hÐ 0| +4 4 ¤t)Èä. Ko 127 ¥ 11 $$ p 8à ! FM üht p ¥XÀ\ FM Ð LÐ ¨ pD ` ƵÈä. ! LÐ ¨ p<\ AM üh ¨Ä p ` µÈä. ! ´¥ CD t´@ @ð CD t´ Ù<\ @ ¨X LÐ üh<\ p ´ µÈä. ! x00 1ü x00 2 Ù<\ @ ¨X LÐ üh<\ p´ µÈä. Ù TA EQ(Ù Ü , Ù t|t ) Ù Ü , 0¥@ Ù<\ ¤<ä @ è X ¬tX p¬| piÈä. Ù t|t Ù<\ Ù( ´X L¥ ¹1D !\ ÄÐ t ô| 0\ Ù t|t á D Ý1iÈä. ½à ¬à| )ÀX0 t ´ Ð Ù TA EQ 0¥D XÀ ÈíÜ$. t 0¥t Ù t|t á D Ý1X0 t Ù( ´X L¥ ¹1D !` L ¤<äÐ p ! ¤(¡ L)t % Ä µÈä. üX ! äL ptÐ Ù TA EQ 0¥D X t ¤<ä Á Ä µÈä. Ù TA EQ 0¥D X0 Ð t ptäD Uxt üÜ0 Èä. ¤<ä UX ð°ÈD ½°. (. Ä) ¤<ä °| %Ð ð° ½°.) ¤<ä ¤<äX \ % Ì ©Éô ä @ %D õX Ì pÐ ð° ÈD ½°. ! Ètl H\ XÐ XXà ät ! ¤X ¬ äÀà !Ð Üt x$ 128 Ko 00¬ Ðt ¨ Ä µÈä. ÜÜ Ètl| À XÐ XÜ üíÜ$. Ù TA EQ 0¥D X0 Ð ! Ù( ÔÄü дèD Dà ¥\ p© \ óÐ Ù TA EQ 0¥D t üíÜ$. \ Ù( ´X tðt 4 TX ÐD (èXp Ù TA EQ 0¥D X0 Ð Ù(Ð XÌ üÜ0 Èä. ! ¤ üX äx ¬(üÀ ¬, ÔÄ ¬, TL ñ) Ù( ´X L¥ ¹1 !D ,t XÀ »XÄ] ` Ä µÈä. ! ÜÜ õ Ètl| ¬©t Ù TA EQ 0¥D t üíÜ$. äx Ètl| ¬©Xt !D ` Æ p Ù( ´X L¥ ¹1 !D ,t XÀ »` Ä µÈä. ! ) ¤<ä ð°´ À JD ½° Ù TA EQ 0¥t ƵÈä. ! t 00 % ¨ ´ 0¥D Ì pÐ ð°ÈD ½°, Ì pX % ¨D ®t Ù TA EQ| ¬ ©XÀ »` Ä µÈä. Ì pX % ¨D \ X\ $t üíÜ $. ! t 00 LPF ¥) Ì pÐ ð° ÈD L LPF| Dà Ù TA EQ| t üíÜ$. LPF U\ !D )t` ĵÈä. ! Ù TA EQ 0¥@ $$ $D ä Lü t À½ÜµÈä: tT/8ð¤ $t Y X\ Ì D 5Èä. (119 tÀ| 8pt üí Ü$.) ø= t|t á t FLAT\ X )Èä. (124 tÀ| 8pt üíÜ $.) °| t 00Ð ð°ÈD ½° °| %ü Ä) ¤<äÐ \ X t (¤ D0 $D Ù<\ pX )Èä. ¥ 11 $$ p ! t $t tø t¬` ½°Ð Ù TA EQ| Xt t $t ÀÌÑÈ ä. # Ù TA EQ 0¥D ÜX0 Ð X| ÝXÀ JXät FRt Ù<\ Ý)È ä. Ù TA EQ X0 5 00 ¼È LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 ¨¸(ÄÄ ä)| ¬©t ´ X 8¬ ÀÀ X YÐ )D ¥XÄ] õ Ètl| àÜ üíÜ$. Ù TA EQ 0¥@ Ètl| Xܤ óÐ 0| ì| È Ä µÈä. D\ ½°Ð pÐ Ètl| XÜ Ù TA EQ 0¥D ` Ä µÈä. 3 ÜÙ ¤X| ONt ACC\ Ì$ üíÜ $. Ù(X дèt 0 8 ät ¼ üíÜ$. дèt 0X ,Ð ÝX ¡L<\ xt Ù TA EQ 0¥D , t XÀ »` Ä µÈä. # 00 ¼8 ät LÐD 0 t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 4 Ètl| Xܬ X X| Ýt üíÜ$. 118 tÀX X Ý 0¥ ¬©X0| 8p t üíÜ$. 6 Ù TA EQ ! ¨Ü\ ä´ 0 t | x Ä x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ $. ) (t Ù<\ ô½Èä. \ 1 ¥\ \ p©\ ¥Ð Ù(| ü( Ü¤à ¨à 8ü =8, è| ëà ÔÄD ¼ üíÜ$. ÔÄt Ä Ùt ÔÄ ¡L<\ xt Ù TA EQ 0¥D ,t XÀ »` Ä µÈä. # LÐt ¼8 ät 0¥ p¨ ¨Ü| ÙÜ ´<\h X X| Ux` µÈä. 7 Ètl| t 00X Ètl % Ð B D üíÜ$. 8 Ù TA EQ 0¥D ÜX$t START| ì üíÜ$. 9 10 t´¸ ä´t Üt Ù( < \ 10 ´Ð Ù(X 8D ëD üí Ü$. ! ¤(¡L)t ¤<äÐ %à Ù TA EQ 0¥t Ü)Èä. # ¨à ¤<ä ð°Èät Ù TA EQ 0¥t } 6 ÄÐ DÌ)Èä. Ko 129 ¥ 11 $$ p # Ù TA EQ| ÀX$t STOPD ì üíÜ$. # Ù TA EQ| Ð èX$t EXIT BAND| tíÜ$. 10 Ù TA EQ 0¥t DÌt Complete ¤t)Èä. Ù( ´ L¥ ¹1t ,t À »\ ½° Ðì TÜÀ ¤t)Èä. (139 tÀX Ù TA EQ Ðì TÜÀ t tX0| 8pt üíÜ$.) 11 Ù TA EQ ¨Ü| èX$t EXIT BAND| ì üíÜ$. 12 Ètl| p ^ \ ô¸<¸Ð üXt ô t üíÜ$. Ètl| p ^ \ ô¸<¸ ä x H\ ¥Ð üXt ô t üíÜ$. Ètl| $ Ü ÙH Á¬ Ð xÜ ¤t à(<\ xt ¤À¼t ÉÁ ÀT à¥t Ý` Ä µÈä. 130 Ko ¥ 12 0 $ 0 $ pX0 1 00 ¼È LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 0 $ Tt\ ä´ $t | x Ä x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. LÐt ¼8 ät 0¥ p¨ ¨Ü| ÙÜ ´<\h X X| Ux` µÈä. # í)¥ ¨Ü| èX$t REV| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 0¥ p¨ ¬©X0 ÜÙ ¤X ACC ON XÐ $ ´ ½°, 00X ÐD D t 0¥ p¨ Ù<\ Ü)Èä. 0¥ p¨| ÙXp è` µÈä. t 00X É (ACC)@ ÜÙ ¤XX ON/ OFF Ùü Ù0T èÐ ð°t| iÈä. t XÀ J<t Ù( 00¬ D ¨ µÈä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. 2 0¥ p¨ ¨Ü| ì üíÜ$. # 0 $D èX$t BAND| ì üí Ü$. í)¥ ¨Ü ¬©X0 30 É ÙXÀ Jät TtÐ í) ¥ ÄD Ü\ä ¬äD L¬à ø ÄÐ ä 10Èä í)¥ ÄD ÄiÈä. í)¥ ¨Ü| ÙXp è` µÈ ä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ÁÜÐ í)¥ ¨Ü| Ý X0 t | x Ä x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. \ t 0¥@ t 00X 0 $ D p` 0¥ Èä. 0 $ Tt äLü @ 0¥äD À à µÈä: REV (í)¥ ¨Ü)F.DEMO (0¥ p¨) AUX (ôp %)D.ATT (À8 Ä0) MUTE.S (T Lp/Ä)FMstep (FM Ý èÄ)AMstep (AM Ý èÄ) 2 í)¥ ¨Ü| ÙX$t REV| ì ü íÜ$. ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. | x Ä ÝX$t F.DEMO| 3 0¥ p¨| ÙX$t F.DEMO| ì üíÜ$. ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # 0¥ p¨| èX$t F.DEMO| äÜ ì üíÜ$. ôp $ X ôp 00| t 00@ hØ ¬©` µÈ ä. ôp 00| t 00@ ð°Xì ¬©` ½° ôp $D \1T iÈä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. | x Ä Ko 131 ¥ 12 0 $ 2 AUX ¨Ü| Ü$. ÝX$t AUX| ì üí 3 AUX| ÙX$t AUX| ì üíÜ$. ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # AUX| èX$t AUX| äÜ ì üíÜ $. À8 Ä 0¥ ÝX0 T) ¨t @ CD äx LÐD è` L t|t á ¨D @ ¨< \ $Xt \át Ý` µÈä. À 8 Ä 0¥D ®@ ¨<\ XXt \á D | µÈä. ! Ä 0¥ $t @ ¨| L ¬´Ü Èt T 8X0 L8Ð ôµ t $t ¬©)Èä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. ÝX$t D.ATT| 3 À8 Ä ¨D ¼D ì üíÜ$. ÝX0 t tù ¨ LOW ®L HIGH L 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. 2 T Lp/Ä ¨Ü| MUTE.S| ì üíÜ$. T Lp/Ä XX0 4 T| t 00@ ð°Xì ¬©X ½ ° T| xp x$$t t 00Ð % ¬ Ù<\ pp Ä)È ä. Ko ÝX$t 3 ÐX $D ÝX$t MUTE.S| ì üíÜ$. MUTE.S| | LÈä $t äLü @ \ Ý)Èä: TEL mute (Lp) 10dB ATT (Ä) 20dB ATT (Ä) 20dB ATT 10dB ATTôä T %\ ¨ü| õiÈä. FM Ý © $X0 É Ý Ü ¬©X FM Ý ©@ ¬ $ ©x 100 kHz@ 50 kHz © Ð Ý` µÈä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. | x Ä 2 FM Ý èÄ ¨Ü| ÝX$t NEXT| x ÄÐ FMstepD ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX Ý ©D ¼D ì üíÜ$. 132 | x Ä | x Ä 2 À8 Ä ¨Ü| ì üíÜ$. ¼ ! ¬ pà MUTE ATT \Ü t üh ´| x\ $$ 0¥D p ` ƵÈä. ! T µT ]t Á Ù<\ ÌD Èä. ÝX0 t tù ¼ Ý © 50K 50 kHz 100K 100 kHz ¥ 12 0 $ 8à 50 Khz ©<\ É ÝD äXt )¡m t UX Ý µÈä. Ù Ý 0 ¥D ¬©Xì )¡mD ÝXp É ÝD äÜ ¬©iÈä. \ AM Ý © $X0 AM Ý ©@ ¬ $ ©x 9 kHz@ 10 kHz © Ð Ý` µÈä. ø, ø ¨øÐ | ¬©` ½° Ý ©D 9kHz (531 1,602 kHzLÀ È ©)Ð 10 kHz (530 1,640 kHzLÀ È ©)\ äÜ $iÈä. 1 LÐt ¼Ä ½°Ð x ÁÜ| Àt üíÜ$. | x Ä 2 AM Ý © ¨Ü| ÝX$t NEXT| x ÄÐ AMstepD ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX Ý ©D ¼D ì üíÜ$. ¼ Ý © 9K 9 kHz 10K 10 kHz ÝX0 t tù Ko 133 ¥ 13 0À 0¥ üh Ä Ä0 üh ¨D àX ® Ä ] iÈä(} 90% <\). % Ä0| ÙX$t ATT| ì üíÜ $. ATTt ¤tÐ À©Èä. 3 $` ì% ¤t D ÝX$ t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| tt ì% ¤tX \ t Ý)Èä: |ÔD ÜÄ ¤t $X0 4 Ü| $X$t a b| ì üí Ü$. |, Ô, ðÄ| ܤ$t a| ì üí Ü$. |, Ô, ðÄ| ܤ$t b| ì üíÜ$. # Ä0| èXà Ð üh ¨\ ÌD $t ATT| ì üíÜ$. ÜÄ ¤t| ÙXp è` µÈä. ÜÄ ¤t ÙXp èX0 ¼8 ÜÄ ¤t Àt LÐü 0¥ p¨ ¼8 D L ÜÄ ¤t ¤tÐ À©Èä. 1 CLK| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. CLK À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 ¼Ä ÜÄ ¤t ¨Ü| ÝX$t CLK| tà OFF CLK| Èä. ÜÄ $X0 1 CLK| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. CLK À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÜÄ| $X$t CLK| x ÄÐ TIME| ì üíÜ$. 3 $` ÜÄ \ÜX D ÝX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| tt ÜÄ \ÜX \ t Ý)Èä. Ü 3 OFF CLK| tt ¼Ä ÜÄ ¤t | -Èä. ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # ÜÄ ¤t| D$t OFF CLK| äÜ ì üíÜ$. 4 ÜÄ| $X$t a b| ì üí Ü$. a| tt Ý\ Ü t iÈ ä. b| tt Ý\ Ü t i Èä. Ü $X0 ÜD Ü à8Ð t ¨ÜÐ p ì% ¤t LÐ 0¥ p¨ èÈD LÌ À©Èä. 1 CLK| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. CLK À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 134 2 Ü| $X$t CLK| x ÄÐ DATE| ì üíÜ$. Ko Qܤ0 1 CLK| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. CLK À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÜÄ| $X$t CLK| x ÄÐ TIME| ì üíÜ$. ¥ 13 0À 0¥ 3 ÜD Ü à8Ð Qܤ0 t JUST| ì üíÜ$. \Ü 00 29X | ½° @ ¼ t )Èä. (. 10:18@ 10:00t )Èä.) \Ü 30 59X | ½° @ ,¼ t )Èä. (. 10:36@ 11:00t )Èä.) 8à Ü à8 ¤t $X0 ä Ü Èä ¬´Ü@ `ÈTtXD õX Ü à8 ¤t| \Ü` µÈ ä. 1 CLK| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. CLK À LLÀ NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 2 Ü à8 ¤t| ÝX$t CLK| x ÄÐ T.SGNLD ì üíÜ$. ¤t Ý À½X0 t 00Ð P À 0ø ¤t ¥) ´ µÈä. ¬© ÐX ¤t | Ý` µÈä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. 2 ¤t Ý ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x ÄÐ D.FORM| ì üíÜ $. ¤t Ä pD µt ü p t ´Ä ¤t ôtÄ] p` µÈä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. \ Ü pD X ÙHÐ JUST ¤t À JµÈä. Ä pX0 2 Ä ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x ÄÐ BRGHT| ì üíÜ$. 3 Ä ¨D pX$t c d| ì üíÜ$. c d| | LÈä Ä ¨t X p iÈä. t ¨t Xp hÐ 0| 00 28 \Ü)Èä. 0 p $ XX0 |Ð ÀX \ÜÀ JÄ] X0 t Ù(X äÜ|t¸ Àt ¤ tX 0 Ù<\ p)Èä. 0 p D $ t` µÈä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. 2 0 p ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x ÄÐ DMMER| ì üíÜ$. 3 0 p 0¥D ÙX$t DMMER| ì üíÜ$. ONt ¤tÐ À©Èä. # 0 p 0¥D èX$t DMMER| ä Ü ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX ¤t Ý ¨Ü| FORM1, FORM2 FORM3D ì üíÜ$. Ko 135 ¥ 13 0À 0¥ Ü |t¸ Tt $X0 ¥´ Ü |t¸ Tt X| Ý` µÈä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. 2 Ü |t¸ Ý ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x ÄÐ FLASH| ì üíÜ $. 3 ÐX D ÝX0 t TYPE1 TYPE4 ALL ¼ X| ì üíÜ $. ALLD D L ¨à D \ ¤ t` µÈä. # Ü |t¸| D$t OFF| ì üíÜ $. 0½ (4 Ý ¤t Ý 2(FORM2)D ÝXt 3 X (4 Ð X| Ý` µÈä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. 2 0½ (4 ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x äL PTRND ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX (4D ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t A, B C| 4 XX0 ¤t Ý 3(FORM3)D ÝD ½° ¥ 4 3 X| Ý` µÈ ä. 1 C.MENU| ¤t X0 t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. C.MENU À LLÀ NEXT| ì üí Ü$. 2 4 Ý ¨Ü| ÝX$t C.MENU| x ÄÐ FONT| ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX 4D ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t A, B C| ä\ Ô0Lx<¸ ¤ t ¬©X0 LÐD èX ÙHÐ Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t| 8 µÈä. T Tt $X0 ¥´ 8 À T Tt X| Ý` µÈä. 1 T ¨Ü| ÝX$t ENT| x ÄÐ MOVIE| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX T| ÝX0 t MOVIE1 MOVIE3 ALL ¼ X| ì ü íÜ$. ALLD D ½° T 1Ð 3LÀ ð <\ ¤t| ` µÈä. 8à äx ÙD D ½° T Tt@ |Ü <\ ¬|ÀÀÌ 3 tÄÐ äÜ À È ä. 136 Ko ¥ 13 0À 0¥ ¨ \Ü ¤t $X0 FORM1 ¥´ 8 À ¨ \Ü ¤t X| Ý` µÈä. 1 1ø|´Ü Dü¼ ¨Ü| ÝX$t ENT BG| x ÄÐ BGV| ì üíÜ $. 1 ¨ \Ü ¨Ü| ÝX$t ENT| x ÄÐ S/A| ì üíÜ$. 8à äx ÙD D ½° ¨ \Ü ¤ t |Ü<\ ¬|ÀÀÌ 3 ÄÐ äÜ À ©Èä. ASL ¤t $X0 ASL ¨ü ¨D ¤t ` µÈ ä. (127 tÀ| 8pt üíÜ$.) % ASL ¤t| ÝX$t ENT| x ÄÐ ASL| ì üíÜ$. 8à äx ÙD D ½° ASL ¤t |Ü<\ ¬|ÀÀÌ 3 tÄÐ äÜ À Èä. 1ø|´Ü Dü¼ $X0 ¤t Ý 1(FORM1)D ÝD ½° ¥ 1ø|´Ü Dü¼ 5 X| Ý ` µÈä. ! FORM2| ÝD ½° BG ¤t À J<p t ¨Ü D\1T)Èä. ! FORM3D ÝD ½° 1ø|´ Dü¼ D À½` ƵÈä. \ 2 ÐX ¨ \Ü| ÝX0 t S/A1 S/A3 ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. 2 ÐX Dü¼D ÝX0 t BGV1 BGV5 ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. FORM3 % 1ø|´Ü Dü¼D BGV| ì üíÜ$. ÝX$t ENT@ 1ø|´Ü À Á $X0 1ø|´Ü À Á@ ¤t Ý 1 (FORM1)ÐÌ ©)Èä. ¥´ $ À 1ø|´Ü À Á X| Ý ` µÈä. ! FORM2 FORM3D ÝD ½°, BG ¤t À J<p t ¨Ü D\1T)Èä. 1 1ø|´Ü À Á ¨Ü| ÝX$t ENT BG| x ÄÐ BGP| ì üíÜ $. 2 BGP1 - BGP6@ BGP7 - BGP12 ¬t| XX$t NEXT| ì üíÜ$. 3 ÐX T| ÝX0 t BGP1 BGP6 ( BGP7 - BGP12) ¼ X| ì üíÜ$. Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t èX0 Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t| è` µÈ ä(T Tt, ¨ \Ü ¤t ñ). % Ô0Lx<¸ ¤t| èX$t ENT| x ÄÐ OFF| ì üíÜ$. Ko 137 ¥ 13 0À 0¥ AUX LÐ ¬©X0 CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (ÄÄ ä) @ @ IPBUS-RCA x0ä%0| ¬©Xt t 00| RCA %D ÀÐX ôp 00@ ð°` µÈä. 8\ ´©@ IP-BUS-RCA x0 ä%0 ¬© $ | 8pt üíÜ$. AUX LÐ ÝX0 % AUX| LÐ<\ ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. AUX ¤tÐ À LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. # ôp $t ÙXÀ J<t AUX| Ý` ƵÈä. 8\ ´©@ 131 tÀX ôp $ X| 8pt üíÜ$. AUX © $X0 AUX LÐÐ t ¤tÐ À ©D À½` µÈä. 1 AUX| LÐ<\ ÝX$t SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. AUX ¤tÐ À LLÀ SOURCE| Ü üíÜ$. 2 AUX © % ¨Ü| ÝX$t FUNCD x ÄÐ TTLinD ì üíÜ$. 111 tÀX ¤l © %X0| 8pX à Ù|\ )<\ ü 30 7LÀ| t üíÜ$. 8à TTLinD tÀ J@ ½°|Ä ©D %` ÀÌ 8 D À½` ƵÈä. 138 Ko ] ô ´¥ CD t´ Ðì TÜÀ CD ¬Ý Ð 8 ÝXt Ðì TÜÀ ¤tÐ À©Èä. Ðì TÜÀ ¤tÐ Àt D \| 8pXì ´ ¤ 8xÀ ø¬à Ü\ 8 t° )D UxiÈä. Ðì| t°` Æ<t ä ü t$ÈD D¤ <0\ 8XX íÜ$. Ðx pX ERROR-11, 12, ¤l $ü( 17, 30 ¤l . ERROR-11, 12, ¤l 17, 30 ¤l| P´t üíÜ$. ERROR-10, 11, 0 0Ä Ù( ÜÙ ¤ 12, 17, 30, A0 Ðx X| ON/OFF X\ Xtôp äx LÐ<\ X\ Ä äÜ CD t´\ Xi Èä. ERROR-22, 23 ¬Ý` Æ CD ì÷ ¤l| P´t üíÜ$. ERROR-44 ¨à ¸D t ¤l| P´t Èä. üíÜ$. ´¥ MD t´ Ðì TÜÀ MD ¬Ý Ð 8 ÝXt Ðì TÜÀ ¤tÐ À©Èä. Ðì TÜÀ ¤tÐ Àt D \| 8pXì ´¤ 8xÀ ø¬à Ü\ 8 t° ) D UxiÈä. Ðì| t°` Æ<t ä ü t$ÈD D¤ <0\ 8X XíÜ$. TÜÀ Ðx Blank MD õ ¤l ½ ¤l| P´t ȵÈä. üíÜ$. pX Ðx t 00X (Ä 00X (Ä Á Ù | Á Ù ´\ ´©Èä. ÌD , LLÀ 0 ä$ üíÜ$. pX ERROR-11, 12, ¤l $ü( 17, 30 ¤l . ERROR-11, 12, ¤l 17, 30 ¤l| P´t üíÜ$. ERROR-01, 11, 0 0Ä Ù( ÜÙ ¤ 12, 17, 30, A0, Ðx X| ON/OFF A1 X\ Xtôp äx LÐ<\ X\ Ä äÜ MD t´\ Xi Èä. ERROR-20, 21 \ TÜÀ TÜÀ TEMP ¸ ô| }D MD| äÜ #´ ƵÈä. üíÜ$. ERROR-20, 21, MDÐ 8 24 µÈä. ¤l| P´t üíÜ$. ERROR-23 MDÐ LEt D ¤l| P´t Ì ô 0] üíÜ$. ´ µÈä. ERROR-A1 0 0Ä RESETD ì üí Ðx Ü$. ERROR- MD ¬Ý ¥. ¤l| P´Xp RESETD ì üíÜ$. Ù TA EQ Ðì TÜÀ tt X0 Ù TA EQ| t©t Ù( ´ L¥ ¹1D UX !` ÆD ½° ¤ tÐ Ðì TÜÀ À µÈä. Ð ì TÜÀ ¤tÐ Àt D \ | 8pXì ´¤ 8xÀ ø¬à Ü\ 8 t° )D UxiÈä. Ux Ä äÜ Ü Ät üíÜ$. Ko 139 ] ô TÜÀ Ðx Error check MIC Ètl ð° õ Ètl| À JXL. Ð UäX B D üíÜ$. Error check front SP, Error check FL SP, Error check FR SP, Error check RL SP, Error check RR SP, Error check SW Ètl ¤<ä X ! ¤D ì )` ÆµÈ ä. Error check noise üÀ ¡L ¨t ! Ù(| ¥\ 4 µÈä. \ p©\ óÐ ü (ܤà ÔÄü дè, 0| ¼ üíÜ$. ! Ètl| ,t $t üíÜ $. A.TA&EQ unavailable Ù ¨Ü NW Ù TA EQ 0 ¨Ü\ $È ¥@ NW ¨ÜÐ µÈä. ÙXÀ Jµ Èä. CD t´@ pX ! ¤<ä| ,t ð°À U xt üíÜ$. ! ¤<äÐ ð° Ì pX % ¨D pt ü íÜ$. ! Ètl| ,t $t üíÜ $. Ko ! ¬ÝX0 Ð CD Èp t p ¤À¬À JXÀ Ux iÈä. , , ¤À¼t CD \ ¬ÝÀ JD µÈä. tð ¤l ¬©XÀ ÈíÜ$. ! ¤l| è` ½° 0]t (xÄÀ J@ t)D ÌÀÀ ÈíÜ$. ! ¬©XÀ JD LÐ ¤l| t¤Ð #´ ô iÈä. ! Á¬ D <t ¤l| ô Xp à (Ð xܤÀ ÈíÜ$. ! ¤lX \tÐ tD tp ( | ðp TY <ÈD ;À ÈíÜ$. ! CD \tX $ü <ÈD pX$t Üì ´ D ¬©Xì ¤lX H½Ð e ½<\ æD üíÜ$. ¬ ! D@ t P À Compact Disc Digital Audio Èl CDÌ ¬©t üíÜ$. 140 ! Áx Ð CDÌ ¬©iÈä. ÜY Xp Ðt DÌ CD| ¬©Xt CD t´Ð x¬p \ ¬ÝÀ JD µÈä. ! ´ (Ð 0| ¬©Xt CD t´ ´X Ð µ0 0 µÈä. µ 0 Q°t CD t´ \ Ù XÀ JD µÈä. µ0 Q°È äà èt µ0| pX0 t \ Ü ÙH CD t´| ¼ p CD t´| tpܤà Üì´ <\ ¤ l| æDÈä. ! Ä\ÁÐX ©©<\ xt CD ¬Ýt è µÈä. ] ô CD-R/CD-RW ¤l MP3 WMA | ! MP3 MPEG Audio Layer 3X }´tp $$ U 0 \ D XøiÈä. ! WMA Windows Media" AudioX } ´tp Microsoft CorporationÐ \ $$ U 0 D XøiÈä. WMA pt0 Windows Media Player 7, 7.1 Windows Media Player for Windows XP| ¬©t xT)` µÈä. \ ! CD-R/CD-RW ¤l ¬© Ü, 8X ð0 DÌ ¤lÌ ¬Ýt ¥iÈä. ! ¤l ¹1, ¤lX $ü < È, 00 ´ X $ü, µ0 ñ<\ x t LE CD TT ôè0Ð 0] CD-R/CD-RW ¤l ¬ÝÀ JD µÈä. ! Q© \ø¨ $ X½Ð 0| ôè0 Ð 0]\ ¤l ¬ÝÀ JD µÈä. U\ ì÷<\ 0]XíÜ$. (8\ ´©@ Q© \ø¨ Å´Ð 8 XXíÜ$.) ! Ù( ´X Á¬ , à( ô ì tÐ 0| CD-R/CD-RW ¤l ¬Ý À JD µÈä. ! CD-R/CD-RW ¤lÐ 0] ©ü äx M¤¸ ô t 00Ð \ÜÀ JD µÈä ($$ pt0(CDDA)X ½°). ! t 00 CD-R/CD-RW ¤lX ¸ tð0 0¥D ÀÐiÈä. ¸ tð 0 ô ìh ¸@ Ù<\ t Èä ($$ pt0(CD-DA)X ½ °). ! t 00Ð CD-RW ¤l| ½ Xt, | CD CD-R ¤l| ½ D ½° ôä ¬Ý Üt T 8´ÑÈä. ! CD-R/CD-RW ¤l ¬©X0 Ð üX ¬mD üXt }´ üíÜ$. ! WMA |D xT) X0 t ¬© ¹ Q©\ø¨Ð t t 00 , t ÙXÀ JD Ä µÈä. ! WMA |D xT) X0 t ¬© ¹ Q©\ø¨Ð t h tü ä x M¤¸ ô ,t ¤t À JD Ä µÈä. ! t 00 CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW ¤l ÁÐ ] MP3/WMA |D ¬Ý ` µÈä. Romeo Joliet | Ü ¤\ü ISO9660 ¨ 1 ¨ 2@ 8X1 D À ¤l T)D ¬Ý` µ Èä. ! @ð 8X 8X<\ T) ¤l| ¬ Ý` µÈä. ! MP3/WMA |@ (· 0] pt0 ¡ ü 8XÀ JµÈä. ! U¥(.mp3, .wma)| ìht ¤ t \ 8 «ø 8Ð0 32LÀ Èä. ! ôT tÐ t ¤t ¥\ \ 8 32 Èä. ! Romeo Joliet | ܤ\Ð 0| T ) |X ½° ^Ð 328LÀÌ ¤t µÈä. ! MP3/WMA |ü CD-EXTRA MIXED-MODE CD@ @ $$ pt0 (CD-DA) © ¤l| ¬Ý` ½° P À ¨P ä MP3/WMA@ © CD-DA ¬t| Xh<\hÌ ¬Ý` µÈä. ! ¬ÝD \ ôT Ý Ü ¤@ äx Ù @ ¸è´Ð Xt ¬© ð0 Ü ¤ )Èä. tì\ t \ xt ¬ Ý ÜÐ 0 Ü ¤ ä ¬Ý Ü ¤@ |XXÀ JD Ä µÈä. ø ì ¬Ý $D È©X ¸è´Ä µÈä. ! MP3 WMA |X tD ` L t ù | U¥| t üíÜ$(.mp3 .wma). Ko 141 ] ô ! t 00 | t U¥(.mp3 .wma)| Ä MP3 WMA |D ¬Ý iÈä. ¡L à¥D )ÀX0 t MP3 WMA | txX |Ð t U¥| ¬ ©XÀ ÈíÜ$. MP3 ôT ¬ )Èä. Ý ôT ´X ôT\ \Ü ô ! |@ ID3 Üø 1.0 1.1 ì÷ ü h ¤t(¤l ©), ¸ (¸ ©), Dð¤¸(¸ Dð¤¸)Ð t 8X1D ÑÈä. ! 32, 44.1 48 kHz ü| À MP3 |t ¬Ý ½°ÐÌ p 0¥D © ` µÈä. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz ØÁ ü ¬Ý ¥.) ! m3u ¬Ý ©] 8X1@ õÀ JµÈ ä. ! MP3i (MP3 x0ð) mp3 PRO ì÷ü 8XÀ JµÈä. ! MP3 |X ¬´Ü È@ D¸ t¸ D ] ¥Á)Èä. t 00 8 kbps Ð 320 kbpsLÀX D¸ t¸\ ¬Ý ` ÀÌ Uä\ ¬´Ü ÈD 00 t \ 128kbps tÁ<\ T) ¤lÌ ¬©X t µÈä. 1 2 3 1 «ø ¨ WMA ô ! 32, 44.1 48 kHz ü| À WMA |Ì ¬Ý ¥iÈä. ! WMAX ¬´Ü È@ D¸ t¸ D ] ¥Á)Èä. t 00 48 kbpsÐ 192 kbpsLÀX D¸ t¸\ ¬Ý` ÀÌ Uä\ ¬´Ü ÈD 00 t @ D¸ t¸\ T) ¤ lÌ ¬©X t µÈä. ôT MP3/WMA |Ð Xì ! MP3/WMA | ¬© ¥ CD-ROMÐ \ DÐ ÜȵÈä. X 142 Ko 2 Pø ¨ 3 8ø ¨ 8à ! t 00 ôT +| `ùiÈä. ¬© ôT +| `ù` ƵÈä. ! MP3/WMA |D ìhXÀ J ôT| U x` ƵÈä. (tì\ ôT ôT + | ¤tXÀ Jà tÈä.) ! X ôT lp \à 8LÀ l1´ ôT lp ´Ð MP3/WMA| ¬Ý` µÈä. øì 4 Î@ X ôT| À ¤l ¬Ý Üt ¦´ È Ä µ Èä. tì\ t \ ¤lÐ 2 ¨D ü ] ô t ôT lp| 1XÀ J t Á iÈä. ! XX ¤l ´Ð ôTÐ 253LÀ X Dt\ ¬Ýt ¥iÈä. MD t´@ ! ,t tt )À J@ MD ¬©XÀ ÈíÜ$. ,t )À J @ t@ äx óÐ ´ MD| |¼ ÆÄ] iÈä. MD| ¬©X0 Ð , t )À J@ t@ pt È t\ ì üíÜ$. ¬ ! <\ MD T0| ôÀ ÈíÜ$. µÀ\ T0| ô ½° ÁD D Ä µÈ ä. T0 ! MD@ hØ õ ¤ðä t@ ÜÜ À XÐ ì üíÜ$. t XÀ JD ½° tt äx ó Ð ´ ´ ½° MD| p` ÆµÈ ä. \ ! t Èl \Ü´ MD| ¬©Xí Ü$. LE MD txX ¤l| t©Xt 00 Á Ä µÈä. ! MD Á¬ t @ (Ä| <t ü íÜ$. ! MD t¸¬ÀX \tt $ü´ ät hWXà Üì´ <\ Í æD ü íÜ$. ! ¤ , Ü äx 1 <ÈD MDÐ ©XÀ ÈíÜ$. ! MD t¬Ý ¤l| ¬©` ½° t¬Ý ¤lX $ | ÜÜ }´ üíÜ$. t¬Ý ¤l t 00Ð ÁD Ä µÈä. ! 0(t ®@ ½°Ð 0| à Ü MD ¬ÝD Ü\ät t´ ´X Y MD ÁÐ Q°t Ýt Áx ¬Ýt ¥` Ä µÈä. Ì| tì\ Át Ý\ät t´ | } 1Ü Ä ¼ Q° t XÄ] \ Ä Üì´ <\ MD t¸¬ À \tX D æD üíÜ$. Ko 143 ] ô DSP p TÜ Ü¸ 3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü $¸Ìl $ D0 L LPF M HPF High Right Mid Left M LPF H HPF (è ü ¨ 0¸0 Á Ü , $X0 ¤<ä 00 High Left Mid Right Low Left Low Right p¬ \ ¨Ü $¸Ìl $ D0 SW1 (SW2) HPF F HPF R ¨ Á (è ü Ü , $X0 ¤<ä 00 Front Left Front Right Rear Left Rear Right Sub. W p¬ t|t á CUSTOM2 á ü ¨ 144 Ko 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1.25k 2k 3.15k 5k 8k 12.5k ] ô ©´ D¸ t¸ è ù pt0É bps(bits/ second)| ¬©iÈä. D¸ t¸ D ] ¬´Ü ¬ÝD \ ô| T Ît t© ` µÈä. Ù|\ xT) )(MP3@ @ ))D ¬©` ½° t t¸ <t ¬´Ü Èt T ¥Á)Èä. (· ð0 t@ \< XܤlÐ |D ø L@ Ù|X CD-R ñÐ ð0 ÅD X )Ð \ |x ©´ Èä. ID3 Üø t@ MP3 |Ð ¸ ( ô| ´¥Ü ¤ ) Èä. t ´¥ ô ¸ ©, D𤸠t, h ©, LE ¥t, ðÄ, t$ 0À pt0| ìh` µÈä. t ´©@ ID3 Üø ¸Ñ 0¥D Àà ¸è´| t©t \t ¸Ñ` µÈä. t ÜøÐ ¬©` 8X t8 ÀÌ t ô ¸ t ¬Ý L ü µÈä. ISO9660 ì÷ t@ CD-ROM ôT@ | ì÷ \ÁD \ m \ Èä. ISO9660 ì÷Ð t ä Lü @ P À ¨X Üt t¬iÈä. ¨ 1: | t@ 8.3 ì÷(8 X 8\ l1 | U¥@ hØ t@ 88LÀ, 1/2 t¸ ´ 8@ 1/2 t¸ + _ 8 ¬©)<\ l1)Èä. ¨ 2: \ @ð 8X @ð 8X@ tÄÐ \ pt0| T) ` Ä] X ) Èä. CD-ROM, CD-R CD-RWÐ pt0| T)` L ¨à pt0 L0 ]LÀ XX è, , 8X<\ ü)Èä. @ð 8X@ X X ¤lÐ 2 X 8XD T) X ) Èä. | t@ 318LÀ À` µÈä (¬ 08 . | U¥ ìh). ô T 8 ¨LÀX X ôT lp| È µÈä. U¥ ì÷ Joliet: | t@ 64 8LÀ ¥iÈä. Romeo: | t@ 128 8LÀ ¥iÈä. m3u WINAMP ¸è´| t©t Ý1X ¬Ý ©]<\ ¬Ý ©] | U¥(.m3u) | Àà µÈä. MP3 MP3 MPEG Audio Layer 3X }´ È ä. t@ ISO(m \ 0l)X ä4 øù (MPEG)Ð Xt È( $$ U \ Èä. MP3 0tX ¤lÐ Dt 1/10 <\ $$ pt0| U` µÈä. VBR VBR@ À D¸ t¸| XøiÈä. | <\ CBR(| D¸ t¸) ôä ô¸ <\ ¬©)Èä. øì $$ UX D Ð 0| D¸ t¸| p` ð 1 L8Ð ¬´Ü Èôä @ U` ä Ð ° Xà µÈä. WMA WMA Windows Media" AudioX }´t p Microsoft CorporationÐ \ $ $ U 0 D XøiÈä. WMA pt0 Windows Media Player 7, 7.1 Windows Media Player for Windows XP | ¬©t xT)` µÈä. Microsoft, Windows Media, Windows \ à øm 0À m ´Ð Microsoft CorporationX Á\ ñ] Á\ È ä. Ko 145 ] ô ¬ |x ´© Ü© Ð .....................................14.4 V DC (È© U : 12.0 14.4 V DC) À ܤ\ ................................$pð À \ X D .........................10.0 A X (W × H × D): Ü ......................................178 × 100 × 160 mm Ì .................................169 × 94 × 17 mm É ................................................2.5 Kg $$/DSP ð Ì % D ù 22 W - \ % <X¤ 4 ohm, 5% THD tX\ D ¨P 50 15,000 Hz à 8 ©. \ Ì % .........................50 W × 4 X <X¤ ...........................4 W (4 8 W È©) ¬p \ % ¨/% <X¤ .....................................................1.8 V/1 kW ¬´Ü T 0¥ ................+10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB (10 kHz) (üh: -30 dB) t|t (13 4Ü ø= t|t ): ü .................................50/80/125/200/315/500/ 800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz t|t ü ...........................................±12 dB Ù t|t (\ ¨ÜÐ tÌ): ü .................................50/80/125/200/315/500/ 800 Hz 1.25/2/3.15/5/8/12.5 kHz t|t ............+6 -12 dB $¸Ìl (\ ¨Ü): HPF ()/Ä)): ü .......................50/63/80/100/125 Hz 0¸0 .......................-12 dB/oct °|: ü .......................50/63/80/100/125 Hz 0¸0 .......................-18 dB/oct tÝ ............................+6 -24 dB Á ............................Á/íÁ $¸Ìl (3 èt $¸Ìl ¨Ü): àü HPF: ü .......................1.6/2/2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/ 8/10/12.5/16 kHz 0¸0 .......................-6/-12 dB/oct tÝ ............................0 -24 dB/Lp Á ............................Á/íÁ 146 Ko ü HPF/LPF: ü (LPF) .......1.6/2/2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/ 8/10/12.5/16 kHz ü (HPF) ......31.5/40/50/63/80/100/ 125/160/200 Hz 0¸0 (LPF) .......0 (Pass)/-6/-12 dB/oct 0¸0 (HPF) ......0 (Pass)/-6/-12/-18 dB/ oct tÝ ............................0 -24 dB/Lp Á ............................Á/íÁ ü LPF: ü .......................31.5/40/50/63/80/100/ 125/160/200 Hz 0¸0 .......................-6/-12/-18 dB/oct tÝ ............................+6 -24 dB/Lp Á ............................Á/íÁ CD t´ ܤ\ ...........................................ô)¸ ¤l $$ ܤ \ ¬© ¤l ................................ô)¸ ¤l à8 ì÷: ØÁ ü .................44.1 kHz T D¸ ...............16 D¸; ü ¹1 ................................5 20,000 Hz (±1 dB) à8 ¡L D( ...................94 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A $ ¸Ìl) ätù ...........................92 dB (1 kHz) D .........................................2 (¤L$) MP3 T) ì÷ ....................MPEG-1 & 2 $$ t´ 3 WMA T) ì÷ .................Ver. 7 & 8 MD t´ ܤ\ ...........................................øÈ ¤l À8 $$ ܤ\ ¬© ¤l ................................øÈ ¤l à8 ì÷: ØÁ ü .................44.1 kHz T D¸ ...............16 D¸; ü ¹1 ................................20 - 20,000 Hz (±1 dB) à8 ¡L D( ...................90 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A $ ¸Ìl) ätù xÀ ......................90 dB (1 kHz) D .........................................2 (¤L$) FM ü ................................87.5 108.0 MHz ¬© ¥ Ä ...........................8 dBf (0.7¼V/75 W, ¨ x, S/N: 30 dB) ] ô 50 dB H Ä .......................10 dBf (0.9 ¼V/75 W, ¨ x) à8 ¡L D( ...................75 dB (IEC-A $¸Ìl) \á ................................................0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, ¤L$) 0.1 % (65 dBfÐ, 1 kHz, ¨x) ü Qõ ................................30 15,000 Hz (±3 dB) ¤L$ ¬ ...........................45 dB (65 dBf, 1 kHz) \ AM ü ................................531 1,602 kHz (9 kHz) 530 1,640 kHz (10 kHz) ¬© ¥ Ä ...........................18¼V (S/N: 20 dB) à8 ¡L D( ...................65 dB (IEC-A $¸Ìl) 8à ! øm 0À m X ¹È Dolby Laboratories X Èä. ! ¬ü x@ <\ xt ¬ à Æt À½ µÈä. Ko 147 PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 HÒ¡ýPlø =lø : ð-qïµ44_13 ûq : (02) 2521-3588 HÒûP-Plø /¦U : / |cJëSS280_L¿-à 17 1704-06¤ ûq : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2003 by Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. t$ÈD T|tX Ò 2003 t$ÈD T|tX. ¨à ¬ ô h. Printed in Japan |ø xÄ <KYMZF/03C00000> <CRD3785-A> ES